JP6319496B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image (for example, patents). Reference 1).

JP 2004-208830 A

  Here, in order to increase the player's attention to the display effect, it is preferable to perform more realistic image display, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect satisfactorily.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention according to claim 1 is based on arrangement means for arranging image data of an object as three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the viewpoint. The image data of the object is projected onto the set projection plane, and the generation data generated by the data generation means having drawing setting means for generating generation data based on the data projected onto the projection plane is stored. Storage means for
Display control means for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The image data of the object to be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means has data capable of defining a plurality of surfaces, and a three-dimensional shape can be defined by the plurality of surface data. Contains image data of multi-faceted objects,
The data generation means includes
When the image data of the multi-plane object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space to display a multi-plane image corresponding to the image data of the multi-plane object over a plurality of update timings, the virtual 3D of the plurality of plane data A data reading means for reading the set data from the storage means enabling each direction in the space to be changed individually;
By applying the set data to one surface data among adjacent surface data in the plurality of surface data, the direction of the one surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed, and the other surface data is changed to the one surface data. Means for changing the orientation of the other surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space by following the change in the orientation of the surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space;
An application changing unit that changes a mode when the aggregate data is applied to the image data of the multifaceted object between the plurality of update timings;
By changing color information applied to the surface data whose orientation has been changed in units of the surface data in accordance with the orientation of the surface data, the display color of at least a partial region of the multi-surface image Display color changing means for enabling image display that is different between a plurality of update timings;
With
The set data has more unit control data for determining the orientation of one of the surface data than the number of the surface data,
The application changing unit is configured to change the positional relationship of the set data in the virtual three-dimensional space with respect to the image data of the multifaceted object according to switching of the update timing, whereby the unit control data in the image data of the multifaceted object is changed. The correspondence relationship between the surface data to be applied to the unit control data and the unit control data is changed as the update timing is switched.

  According to the present invention, a display effect can be performed satisfactorily.

It is a front view which shows a pachinko machine. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed with a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process performed with a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process performed with a main controller. It is another form of the processing configuration of the main controller, and is a flowchart showing the main processing. It is another form of the processing configuration of the main controller, and is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data is produced with execution of a drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows the hidden surface process using the Z buffer performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the mask performed with display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 1st mask display. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of a 2nd mask display. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the mask performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation generation command response process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the display mode background performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for symbols performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for backgrounds performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for backgrounds performed by VDP. It is a timing chart which shows the timing at which the separate preservation data for the 1st display mode and the separate preservation data for the 2nd display mode are created. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for connection objects performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for connection object effects performed in VDP. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a connection object effect. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the object for particle dispersion, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the texture for particle dispersion, (c)-(e) is for describing key data. It is explanatory drawing of. (A) is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the connection object performed by display CPU, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for blends. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the particle | grain dispersion | distribution effect performed with VDP. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating particle dispersion | distribution production, (b-1) and (b-2) are for demonstrating simply by what locus | trajectory each particle single-piece | unit image is displaced. It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows another form of the setting process for particle | grain dispersion | distribution effects performed by VDP. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the object for sea surface, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating normal map data. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of applying a pair of normal map data to the sea surface object. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to apply the change data with respect to each surface data. (A) is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the sea surface display performed with display CPU, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the animation data for sea surfaces. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the sea surface display performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the normal parameter performed by VDP. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of setting color information to each surface data. (A) is a flowchart which shows the color information setting process for the sea surface display performed by VDP, (b) is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process for the sea surface performed by VDP. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a sea surface display, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating simply the setting aspect of the color information of the area | region where the sea surface display is performed. It is a flowchart which shows another form of the color information setting process for the sea surface display performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for presentation in the opening / closing execution mode performed by display CPU. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each area of VRAM used when adjusting a focus in VDP, (b) is a flowchart which shows the drawing data synthetic | combination process performed in VDP. (A) is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process for focus production performed by VDP, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a focus range and each blurring range. (A) is a flowchart which shows the blurring generation process performed by VDP, (b-1) and (b-2) are explanatory drawings for demonstrating the extraction aspect of the unit area in the blurring generation process. . (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state where focus display is not performed, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state where focus display is performed. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a special object, (b-1)-(b-3) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st partial texture, (c-1)-(c -4) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second partial texture. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for special characters performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the texture mapping process for the special characters performed in VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a pattern change display.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. The game board 20 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, a through gate 25, a variable display unit 26, a main display unit 33, an accessory display unit 34, and the like. ing.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. The game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the game ball enters the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operating port 24, and the electric operating member 24a is in the open state (supported state or guide state). It is possible to win 24.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b that opens and closes the large winning opening 22a. The open / close door 22b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which the game ball is easy to win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It is like that. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As a release mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display section 33 and the accessory display section 34 are provided on the lower side of the game area. In the main display unit 33, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 23 and the winning to the lower working port 24 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display section 33 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 33. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 33 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  The accessory display unit 34 displays a variation of the picture triggered by a winning to the through gate 25, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 25 as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that variably displays a symbol which is a kind of a symbol. The variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The center frame 32 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display surface of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display surface is lowered due to the fall of the game ball is not caused. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 31, the variation display of the symbol is started based on the winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 33, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 31 accordingly. For example, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbol display device 31 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset active line.

  The display content of the symbol display device 31 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 31, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display surface G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) to 2 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows SA1, SA2, and SA3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row SA1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row SA3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row SA1 and the lower symbol row SA3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row SA2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row SA2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface G, the symbols of these symbol rows SA1 to SA3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 3B, on the display surface G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. On the display surface G, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row SA1 → the lower symbol row SA3 → the middle symbol row SA2, and all the symbol rows SA1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.SA3 is finished, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 is finished in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In addition, based on the winning of any one of the operating ports 23 and 24, the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 start the variable display, display a predetermined stop result, and stop the variable display. It corresponds to one game time.

  A first holding light emitting unit 35 corresponding to the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed when the first holding light emitting unit 35 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 32, a second reserved light emitting unit 36 corresponding to the accessory display unit 34 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding light emitting unit 36. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance light emission parts 35 and 36 is fulfilled by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 31. FIG.

  A rail portion 37 is attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is constituted by the rail portion 37, and the game board 20 is fired from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. A game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launch handle 41 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window part 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel (not shown) is fitted therein. The window panel is made colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be made colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  A light emitting means is provided around the window portion 42. A display light-emitting part 44 is provided above the window part 42 as a part of the light-emitting means. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 44, speaker units 45 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 42 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 that bulge to the near side are provided in parallel. An upper pan 46 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower pan 47 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 46a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 46a and the lower plate 47a.

  In the region of the upper bulging portion 46 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating device 48 having an operation portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player so that the effect content on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is the predetermined effect content.

  A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power source and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a basic electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main control device 50, a trace box for giving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening is provided to the board box that accommodates the main control board 51 or the like. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is attached by peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 53 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power source and launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power source and launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, while generating the operating power required for each to the main control board 51, the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 130 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power source and launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 so that the MPU 52 executes processing for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, there are detection sensors provided one-to-one with respect to a winning-corresponding ball entering portion such as a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port 23, a lower operating port 24, and a through gate 25. It is included, and MPU 52 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) to each winning part. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a lottery occurrence lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winning to the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24, and also executes a reach occurrence lottery and a display continuation time determination lottery for each game.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the display device 31 changes and fluctuates, random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, fluctuations in the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31 A variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 54 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 54a, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 occurs. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b as a means.

  The holding ball storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 54a is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 33, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table in a success / failure table storage area in the ROM 53 as the success / failure information group storage means. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are: (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the bottom after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 22 can be controlled so that the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 22 is relatively high from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed 15 times (number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed twice (number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 22a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 41 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 seconds. . On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 22a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  The number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 22a in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for opening once, and the opening limit number for opening once are the low-frequency winning mode in the high-frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 22 increases from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or if the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the open limit number is set shorter than the open limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 22 does not occur substantially.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24, the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 24a is opened is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 23 than in the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is connected to the lower operating port 24. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (for example, on the display part 34 based on a winning to the through gate 25) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, In this case, one condition or any combination of conditions is applied among shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 53 as the distribution information group storage means as a distribution table. As the distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the modes of the probability variation jackpot result are diversified. That is, when two types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode is the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the lowest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result that is the high-frequency support mode. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / failing lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An explicit 2R probability change jackpot result (an explicit high probability corresponding game result or a result of a latent probability change state) may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probable jackpot results is achieved.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, there may be included a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not shift to the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. . In the configuration in which both the above-described non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlier result are set, the switching execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. However, if one of the results of non-explicit 2R probability change jackpot or special outage occurs in the normal gaming state, for example, it will be It is possible to cause the player to predict which result actually corresponds to.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 31. An expected effect is a gaming machine that includes a symbol display device 31 that can perform variable display of a symbol, and in which the opening / closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is a special display result. The display state for causing the player to think that the state is the variable display state that is likely to become the special display result at the stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display on the symbol display device 31 is started. Say.

  In the expected effect, two types are set: the reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display or the generation of a special display result at a stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is achieved by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol rows displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that are likely to be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  More specifically, the reach display related to the symbol variation display is performed as a step before the symbol variation display is terminated, in order to generate the high-frequency winning mode on the preset effective line in the display surface of the symbol display device 31. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a reach symbol combination for which a corresponding jackpot symbol combination may be established, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, a symbol variation display is displayed by the final stop symbol sequence. Is to do.

  The display contents of FIG. 3 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row SA1, and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row SA3, any one of the valid display items is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row SA2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row SA2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the notice display, the symbol display on the display surface of the symbol display device 31 is started in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 after the symbol variation display is started, or in some symbol columns. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background image the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column SA1-SA3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and the reach random numbers in game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode that becomes the low-frequency winning mode. It is not executed regardless of the value of the counter C3. In the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission controller 60.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 33 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 31. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the main display unit 33 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 54c at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power source and launch control device 57 is connected. For example, a payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power source and firing control device 57 based on the firing handle 41 being operated. Based on the launch permission command received from the main controller 50, the power supply and launch control device 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area.

  Further, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and display control of the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, display control of the main display unit 33 is executed in the MPU 52 at each game round. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 24a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 34 is executed in the MPU 52.

  The MPU 52 is connected to a variable winning drive unit that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22 and an electric combination driving unit that opens and closes the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24. . That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 24a is won, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit so that the electric combination 24a is opened and closed.

  Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

<Processing executed by MPU 52 of main controller 50>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 repeatedly executes a predetermined game progress process after the power is turned on. In the pachinko machine 10, as the game progress process, the normal process that is repeatedly executed in the first period and the second period that is shorter than the first period are started, and are executed by interrupting the normal process. Timer interrupt processing is set.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Note that this process is periodically started by the MPU 52 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S101, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors are read, the states of the various winning detection sensors are determined, and the winning detection information is stored. In addition, when the winning detection sensor corresponding to the generation of the winning ball detects the winning of the game ball, a winning ball command for instructing the payout control device 55 to pay out the winning ball is set.

  In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 25 is executed. In the through-winning process, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is used as the electric power on condition that the number of stored bonus items stored in the electric power reservation area 54c is less than four. Store in the reserved area 54c.

  Thereafter, in step S105, a winning process for the working opening accompanying winning of the working openings 23 and 24 is executed. In the winning process for the operating opening, if a winning has occurred in the upper operating opening 23 or the lower operating opening 24, the start reserved memory number stored in the holding ball storage area 54b is the upper limit number (for example, “ 4)), the numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b. . In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number. After executing the process of step S105, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing normal processing. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on. As its outline, the processing from step S201 to step S209 is executed as a 4 msec cycle processing, and the counter update processing of step S210 and step S211 is executed in the remaining time.

  In step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interruption process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 55. Further, when a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  In the subsequent step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, symbol variable display setting by the symbol display device 31, display control of the main display unit 33, and the like are performed.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. In the gaming state transition process, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed, the transition process to the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 22 is started. Various commands for the opening / closing execution mode are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 when starting the opening / closing execution mode, during the opening / closing execution mode, and when ending the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the success / failure lottery mode transition or the support mode transition is executed in correspondence with the jackpot type related to the game times that triggered the start of the mode.

  In the subsequent step S205, a demonstration display process is executed. In the demonstration display process, a predetermined demonstration start waiting period (for example, 0.1 sec) has elapsed without starting a new game time after the game time has ended in a state where the opening / closing execution mode is not in progress. A process for determining whether or not the process has been performed is executed. In addition, since a power supply to the MPU 52 is started or the pachinko machine 10 is reset, a predetermined demonstration start start period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed without newly starting a game play. A process for determining whether or not the process has been performed is executed. If it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  The demonstration display refers to a start waiting effect displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 when a predetermined start waiting period has elapsed. In the demo image, an image in which the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 perform a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbols perform a predetermined operation. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying a displayed image. In addition, in the configuration in which the demonstration display is performed by the animation of the symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol rows SA1 to SA3, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the immediately preceding game round may be used as the symbol. In this case, the demonstration display can be diversified.

  In a succeeding step S206, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 24a provided in the lower operation port 24 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the information stored in the electronic combination holding area 54c of the RAM 54 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric combination 24a, to open / close the electric combination 24a, and for the combination Display control of the display unit 34 is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S207, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 58 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power source and launch control device 57. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S208, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM. The power interruption flag is a flag that is stored when the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed, and is deleted in the next main processing.

  If the power interruption flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S209, that is, the previous process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S210, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. In step S211, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S208 that the power interruption flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S212 is executed. That is, in step S212, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S213. After the access of the RAM 54 is prohibited in step S214, the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

  Next, the game times control process of step S203 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game turn control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S302. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 23 and 24 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in a variable display. When the main display unit 33 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn starting process in steps S303 to S305.

  In the game turn starting process, first, in step S303, it is determined whether or not the number N of starting reserved balls is “0”. The case where the starting reserved ball number N is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 54b. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the number N of starting reserved balls is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 54b for variable display is executed in step S304. Specifically, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 is shifted in order to the lower area side. Then, after executing the variation start process in step S305, the game times control process is terminated.

  The variation start process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, with reference to numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE and a hit / fail table corresponding to the current hit / fail lottery mode, it is determined whether or not the jackpot win is set. To do.

  In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won. If it is a big win, a type determination process is executed in step S403. In the type determination process, the jackpot type is specified with reference to the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 and the distribution table among the hold information shifted to the execution area AE.

  In subsequent step S404, stop result setting processing corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game times related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 53 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. In the jackpot result stop result table, the types of patterns stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 are set differently for each jackpot result type. In step S404, the type of pattern is specified in step S403. Information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 54.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S405. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 33 in the game round relating to the start of the current change is specified from the stop result table for off-time stored in the ROM 53 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 54. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing the process of step S404 or step S405, the process for setting the variable display time is executed in step S406.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 54a of the RAM 54 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is a jackpot result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Even if it is not a jackpot result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 53, and the fluctuation Display time information is set in a variable display time counter provided in the RAM 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table stored in the ROM 53. Then, the variation display time information is set in the variation display time counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach generation variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of starting reserved balls increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation variation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not vary according to the number of starting reserved balls and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a variable display time table may be individually set for each of the case of out-of-bound reach and the case of no reach.

  After executing the variable display time setting process in step S406, a variable command and a type command are set in step S407. The change command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the information on the presence or absence of the reach is not included in the command for use, the sound emission control device 60 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, any one of normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, 15R probability variation jackpot result information, and outage result information.

  The change command and type command set in step S407 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). After performing the process of step S407, the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the main display unit 33 in step S408. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 8), when the main display unit 33 is in a variable display, the processes of steps S306 to S309 are executed. In this process, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the current game time variation display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 33 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S308. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 54 in the process of step S404 or step S405 is specified, and the main display unit 33 is displayed so that the pattern form corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 33. Control display.

  In the subsequent step S309, a change end command is set. The change end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 7). The sound emission control device 60 ends the effect in the game time based on the received variation end command. In addition, a command corresponding to the command is transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 70, and the display control device 70 displays a final combination of final stop symbols in the game times (final stop display). Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

<Another Form of Processing Configuration in MPU 52 of Main Controller 50>
The processing configuration executed by the MPU 52 is not limited to the above, and may be the following processing configuration. 10 and 11 are flowcharts for explaining another form of processing in the MPU 52. FIG. 10 shows main processing executed when the supply of operating power is started. FIG. 11 shows the main processing. The timer interrupt processing that is periodically interrupted and started is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the main process, first, in step S501, a start-up process associated with power-on is executed. In the subsequent step S502, access to the RAM 54 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 57 is turned on. In subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM. In step S505, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S506, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined.

  If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power interruption flag is stored, and the RAM determination value is normal, the power interruption flag is erased from the RAM 54 in step S507, and the RAM is deleted in step S508. Erase the judgment value. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S509, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S510, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S511. And after performing the process of step S509-step S511, it returns to step S509 and repeats the process of step S509-step S511.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which performs the setting of an interruption prohibition immediately after setting an interruption permission in step S509. In this case, the timer interrupt processing to be described later may be configured to wait for execution until the next interrupt permission setting is performed when the start timing is reached in a situation where the interrupt prohibition setting is performed. .

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S512 to S513. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held by the RAM determination value is confirmed, the process proceeds to steps S512 to S513.

  In step S512, the used area of the RAM 54 is cleared to “0”, and in step S513, initial setting of the RAM 54 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to steps S509 to S511.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process in the different form.

  In the timer interrupt process, the same processes as in steps S101 to S105 are executed in steps S601 to S605.

  Thereafter, in step S606, update processing of the variation type counter CS is executed, game time control processing is executed in step S607, game state transition processing is executed in step S608, and demo display processing is executed in step S609. Is executed, a power support process is executed in step S610, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S611, and an external output process is executed in step S612. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. The detailed contents of these processes are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 63 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. In addition, a configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An effect operating device 48 and a main control device 50 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and various light emitting units 35, 36, 44, a speaker unit 45, and a display control device 130 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Yes.

  The MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start an effect for game times by receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, and executes an effect start process for game times. In addition, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effect for the game turn, and the game turn effect end process is executed. Also, by receiving the various jackpot presentation commands transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the jackpot presentation needs to be started or advanced, and the jackpot presentation process is executed. Further, by receiving the demonstration display command transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the demonstration display needs to be started, and the demonstration display processing is executed.

  Note that the MPU 62 receiving a command from the main control device 50 is not limited to a configuration for directly receiving a command from the main control device 50, and includes a configuration for receiving a command relayed to a relay board.

  In the game turn production start process, based on both the change command and the type command, the change display time grasp process for grasping the change display time of the corresponding game turn and the reach display grasp process for grasping the presence or absence of reach display. And a jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence / absence of the jackpot result and a jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs. In addition, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the grasping process for generating the jackpot result, and the grasping process for the jackpot type, the pattern for determining the kind of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 in this game round. Execute type grasp processing. Then, based on the results of the above grasping processes, a display control device includes a change pattern command including information on the change display time and information on the type of display effect, and a design designation command including information on the type of design to be finally stopped and displayed. To 130.

  In addition, in the game turn production start process, in addition to the above-described grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for determining whether or not to perform a notice display is executed. In this case, the lottery process is also executed for the type lottery of the notice display. If it is determined that the notice display has been generated, a notice command including information on the type of notice display is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  Further, in the game start effect starting process, the game light display light emission table and the game turn sound table are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of the above processes. The display light emission table for game times defines the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 during the progress of the corresponding game times. In addition, an output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the corresponding game round is defined by the game round voice table.

  In the game round effect end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are terminated. Further, in the game turn effect end process, an end command including information for ending the game turn effect is transmitted to the display control device 130.

  In the jackpot presentation process, based on the various commands for the jackpot presentation received, the presentation mode at the opening, at each round, between each round, and at the ending is grasped, and the jackpot presentation corresponding to the grasped result Is sent to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for the jackpot effect and the sound table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the jackpot effect. Is specified.

  In the demonstration display processing, the demonstration display presentation mode is grasped based on the received demonstration display command, and the demonstration display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 130. Further, based on the grasped result, the display light emission table for demonstration display and the sound table for demonstration display are read from the ROM 63, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the demonstration display. Is specified.

  The processing executed by the MPU 62 based on the command transmitted from the main controller 50 includes processing for controlling the light emission of the first hold light emitting unit 35 and the second hold light emitting unit 36 in addition to the above processing. included.

  Further, the MPU 62 recognizes that the production operation device 48 is operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the production operation device 48 based on the operation of the production operation device 48 being operated. Then, the operation handling process is executed. Further, even when the operated state is released, it is recognized by the falling edge of the operation signal, and the operation corresponding process is executed.

  Here, as part of the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 48, an effect in which the display mode is changed is executed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48. The display mode is a state in which the standby image displayed until the game round is started and the game round image displayed in the situation where the game round is executed are determined to a predetermined type, and a plurality of types are displayed. The display mode is set. The detailed contents of the display mode and the processing configuration relating to the switching of the display mode based on the operation of the effect operating device 48 will be described in detail later.

<Display control device 130>
A hardware configuration of the display control device 130 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to an input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. Is done. Note that the display CPU 131 receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 is not limited to a structure that directly receives a command from the sound light emission control device 60, and includes a structure that receives a command relayed to the relay board. It is.

  The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus. Based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60, the display CPU 131 stores various data stored in the memory module 133 in the work RAM 132 and the VRAM 134. The transfer instruction to transfer is performed. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, a display instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 31. Do. Hereinafter, the memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described.

  The memory module 133 is storage means that stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance and stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 133 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM).

  Various image data stored in the memory module 133 includes image data for objects such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 31, texture image data to be pasted on the object, and one frame worth of data. Image data for the back surface constituting the image on the back surface.

  Here, the object is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object image data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object as the origin. That is, in the image data for each object, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  A texture is an image to be pasted on each polygon of an object, and a texture image is pasted on an object, thereby generating a display image including an image corresponding to the object, for example, a design or a character. The manner of holding the image data for texture is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Yes.

  The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The manner of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, a plate polygon is used when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system.

  The work RAM 132 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 133 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 132 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily performed. The work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133, control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. The display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 134 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 31. The VRAM 134 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and holding, and an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory in detail. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbit, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 134 includes a development buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the development buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. In this case, the image data is transferred in advance until the execution timing of the process in the VDP 135 using the image data. The VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data (generated data) is created by the VDP 135. The VRAM 134 is provided with a Z buffer 143, a screen buffer 144, and a mode buffer 145, which will be described later in detail.

  The VDP 135 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 31 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the development buffer 141 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. Yes, it is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 31b incorporated in the design display device 31 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 31a. Since the VDP 135 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 135 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, a display mode control unit 154, and a display circuit 155. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and an I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

  The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object specified as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. In addition, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after placing an object in the world coordinate system. Then, the object is clipped so as to finally correspond to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface G.

  Based on the drawing list stored in the register 153, the rendering unit 152 adjusts the light source and attaches a texture to each clipped object to determine the appearance of the object. In addition, the rendering unit 152 projects each object onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on depth information, and renders drawing data for one frame, which is two-dimensional data, as a frame buffer. Created in 142. The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are stored. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute processing according to the contents of the above. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 133 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute the process only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using a program.

  Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame regions 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame region 142a and a second frame region 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 31a (that is, the display surface G) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b are provided in the frame buffer 142, drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame regions. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

  In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 31a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame region 142a or the second frame region 142b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 31 through the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 142 a and 142 b to be output to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 31. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 31 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 155 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

  Further, the display mode control unit 154 executes predetermined processing based on the drawing list stored in the register 153 when displaying an image corresponding to the display mode. The predetermined process will be described later.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 131>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described.

<Main processing>
First, a description will be given of a main process that is started when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main process.

  In the main process, an initial setting process is first executed in step S701.

  In the initial setting process, a scaler initial adjustment process of the display circuit 155 is executed. In the initial adjustment process, when an image signal is output based on the drawing data created in each frame area 142a, 142b of the VRAM 134, the image signal is output corresponding to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a. As described above, a resolution initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135. This initial adjustment value is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a resolution initial adjustment command.

  By transmitting a resolution initial adjustment command to the VDP 135, numerical information corresponding to the initial adjustment value is stored in the resolution adjustment area of the scaler in the register 153 of the VDP 135. Thus, when an image signal is output from the VDP 135 to the symbol display device 31, the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is output in a state adjusted to the number of dots of the liquid crystal display unit 31a.

  In the initial setting process, an initial adjustment process for the ground color is executed. In the initial adjustment process, a ground color initial adjustment command is transmitted to the VDP 135 so that numerical information set as initial values in the unit areas of the frame regions 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 becomes initial numerical information. This initial numerical information is adjusted at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and the adjustment result is set as a ground color initial adjustment command.

  When the VDP 135 transmits a ground color initial adjustment command, initial numerical information is stored in the ground color adjustment area in the register 153 of the VDP 135. As a result, when the drawing data is created, the background color is displayed in the dots corresponding to the unit areas that have not been updated from the initial numerical information. In the present pachinko machine 10, black is set as the initial ground color, but it is not limited to this and is optional.

  After executing the initial setting process in step S701, various interrupts are permitted in step S702. This allows the display CPU 131 to execute command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. Thereafter, in the main process, the process of step S702 is repeated.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing will be described.

  The command interrupt process is a process that is started with the highest priority when a strobe signal is received from the sound emission control device 60, whatever the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 137 is transferred to the command buffer provided in the work RAM 132, and a flag indicating that a new command has been received is set in the corresponding area. Thereafter, the command interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the process before starting the command interrupt process.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle, specifically, 20 msec.

  When the image signal for one frame is output to the symbol display device 31, the VDP 135 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface G, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the arranged dots, and image signals are output from the left to the right dots in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface G. In this case, the VDP 135 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 131 at the timing when the image signal is output to the last dot, thereby causing the display CPU 131 to recognize that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, in step S801, command analysis processing is executed. Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 132 are analyzed. In the subsequent step S802, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received based on the analysis result in step S801. If a new command has been received, command response processing is executed in step S803.

  In the command handling process, a data table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 133. The data table defines the processing necessary to display an image for one frame at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surface G of the symbol display device 31. Information group.

  Here, as described above, the commands received by the display CPU 131 from the sound emission control device 60 include a variation pattern command, a symbol designation command, and a notice command. When these commands are received, a data table necessary for executing the game turning effects corresponding to the respective commands on the symbol display device 31 is read out. The received command is an end command, and when the command is received, a data table necessary for finally stopping the currently executed game turning effect is read. The received command includes various commands for jackpot presentation. When the command is received, a data table necessary for executing the jackpot presentation is read. The received command includes a demo display command. When the command is received, a data table necessary for executing the demo display is read out. Furthermore, based on the read data table, other program data necessary for executing processing is also read.

  After executing the command response process in step S803, the pointer update process is executed in step S804. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, it is possible for the display CPU 131 to grasp processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In a succeeding step S805, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, a parameter necessary for performing a drawing instruction to the VDP 135 is calculated. Details of the task processing will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S806, a drawing list output process is executed. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 135. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. In the VDP 135, drawing data is created in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the VRAM 134 according to the drawing list. The processing in this VDP 135 will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the V interrupt process is terminated.

<Task processing in display CPU 131>
Here, the task processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the task processing, first, in step S901, setting processing for starting control is executed. In the setting process for starting control, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 131 in the current processing time is executed. The individual image is one two-dimensional image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface, or one three-dimensional image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. It is an image.

  Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled in the current processing round. If present, the work RAM 132 searches for a free buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as a control start target on a one-to-one basis. Reserve a free buffer area. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to individual images are set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

  In subsequent step S902, the control update target is grasped. This control update target is an individual image for which the control start process has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing time.

  In the subsequent step S903, a background calculation process is executed. In the background calculation processing, coordinates, rotation angles, scales, light information for adding light and darkness, and projections are applied to the background image and background characters that make up the background image. Processing for calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation is executed.

  In a succeeding step S904, an effect calculation process is executed. In the effect calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

  In a succeeding step S905, a symbol calculation process is executed. In the symbol calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is performed on a symbol image to be subjected to variable display in each game round.

  Incidentally, in each process of step S903 to step S905, a process of updating the control start parameter set in step S901 is executed. Further, in each process of step S903 to step S905, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 133 and is determined according to the type of individual image.

  Thereafter, in step S906, after performing the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, this task process is terminated. In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images that have been controlled and updated by the processes in steps S903 to S905. Execute. The grasp is performed based on the currently set data table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S906. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 135 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S906 is executed. There is no need.

  In the setting process for starting control in step S901, the control start timing of each individual image may be set in a distributed manner in order to distribute the processing load of the display CPU 131.

<Basic processing in the VDP 135>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

  In the VDP 135, a process for setting the value of the register 153 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process for creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least processing for outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame regions 142a and 142b.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 15A to 15C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created, is set for an image of one frame related to the drawing list. Yes. In addition, various designation information is set in the header information. The contents of the various designation information will be described later. When moving image data is included as image data handled by the VDP 135, the header information includes the presence / absence of decoding designation and the address information at which the moving image data to be decoded is stored in the memory module 133. It may be set.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system are set when creating the drawing data this time, and information on the drawing order of each image data, Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be sequential numerical value information, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 15A, the back side image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. Yes. Also, as the order after the background image data, the effect image data is set, for example, the effect object A is set as mth, the effect object B is set as m + 1, and so on. Yes. Further, as the order after the effect image data, symbol image data is set, for example, symbol object A is set as nth, symbol object B is set as n + 1th,... Yes.

  It should be noted that the order in which the image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the set order may be the reverse of the above, and the design image The image data for presentation or the image data for background may be set after the data, and the image data for the design is set in the order between the predetermined presentation image data and the other presentation image data. May be.

  Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... A plurality of types of parameters are set. Specifically, the parameter P (1) of the image data for the back surface, as shown in FIG. 15B, the address information of the area where the image data for the back surface is stored in the memory module 133, and the back surface image data Information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the image data of the world and the world coordinate system when setting the image data for the back surface Rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the image, scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, and the image for the back surface Uniform α value information indicating the entire transmission information (or transparency information) when data is set is set.

  Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all the vertices of the image data for the object. The coordinate information is set for the object image data, but is not set for the texture image data. In the texture image data, the coordinate value of each pixel is determined in advance in association with each vertex of the image data for the object. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to a combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 135 when texture mapping is performed.

  In the parameter (P1), when rendering image data for the back side and camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of the virtual camera when the back side image data is projected on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing And light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow at.

  In the parameter (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. The Z buffer method means that each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z axis when a large number of objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a depth adjustment processing method in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 142a and 142b. When applying the Z buffer method, a Z buffer 143 provided in the VRAM 134 is used. A specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 will be described later.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, the Z sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 142a and 142b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition process of the numerical information and the calculation process for fusion are executed. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when an effect image is displayed.

  The parameter (P1) includes α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and application target, fog specification information indicating whether or not fog is applied, and a background created to display a background image. Information for specifying another save indicating whether or not the image drawing data is saved is set.

  Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of two-dimensional still image data or texture image data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as image data. The alpha data can make the transmission information different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture image data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, the transparency of the two-dimensional still image data and the texture image data is not controlled finely in units of pixels, but is uniform for all pixels. In such a situation, it is possible to deal with a uniform α value, so that the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, the transparency can be finely controlled in units of pixels.

  The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or inside a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, when a fog similar to that of other objects is applied to an object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction, another fog is set for the object in a situation where the material is not too dark due to being too dark. It may be configured. Thereby, the effect by setting fog can be acquired, without impairing the said texture.

  The separate storage means that the drawn data for the background image once created is written and stored in the mode buffer 145 provided separately from the frame areas 142a and 142b in order to use the drawn data for the background image as it is in the subsequent frames. As shown in FIG. 4, the mode buffer 145 is provided with a first mode area 145a and a second mode area 145b so as to correspond to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. The specific contents of this separate storage will be described in detail later.

  With other parameters such as parameter P (2), as shown in FIG. 15 (c), out of the various types of information shown in FIG. Information is set. As these pieces of information, information on addresses of areas where objects and textures are stored in the memory module 133 is set.

  Drawing processing in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, the manner in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed in step S1002.

  In the background setting process, the image data for the back and the character object for displaying the background image are grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the character object are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Thereafter, the memory module 133 grasps and reads out the address where the image data is stored, and the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data so that the coordinates, rotation angle and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. A world conversion process is performed to convert to a coordinate value of the world coordinate system, and the buffer area is set as described above.

  If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In the background setting process, a control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In continuing step S1003, the setting process for production is executed. In the effect setting process, an object for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. In the effect setting process, a control end process for erasing effect image data not specified in the current drawing list among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  In the subsequent step S1004, a symbol setting process is executed. In the symbol setting process, an object for displaying a symbol is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to erase the symbol image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  By executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004, as shown in FIG. 17, it is designated as an arrangement target by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X axis, the Y axis, and the Z axis. The setting of the scene in which the rearmost image PC1 and the various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged with the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified by the drawing list is completed.

  Note that FIG. 17 simply shows a state in which the rearmost image PC1 and the various objects PC2 to PC10 are arranged. Further, in the rearmost image PC1, it is not necessary that the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are set on the back side with respect to all of the various objects PC2 to PC10. For example, the rearmost image PC1 is bent or inclined. It is good also as a structure by which the coordinate of a Z-axis direction becomes a near side rather than a part of object. However, the region of the rearmost image PC1 in which the coordinates in the X-axis direction and the coordinates in the Y-axis direction are the same as this part of the object has all the coordinates in the Z-axis direction behind that object, The object is not covered by the rearmost image PC1.

  In a succeeding step S1005, conversion processing to a camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 17, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC11 is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the backmost image PC1 and the various objects PC2 to PC10), and a camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. Thus, by setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image, the viewpoint can be switched individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 17 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  In subsequent step S1006, conversion processing to a visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. Thereby, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  In a succeeding step S1007, a clipping process is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S1006 is grasped with a corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, extraction is performed in step S1006 on the basis of the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display surface G of the symbol display device 31). Clip each individual image.

  In a succeeding step S1008, a lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows and reflections are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  In the subsequent step S1009, color information setting processing is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process for pasting a texture corresponding to each object extracted by the clipping process is executed. Further, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1010 and step S1011, each individual image extracted in step S1007 and further subjected to lighting processing and color information setting processing is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). Drawing data is created by performing parallel projection.

  Specifically, first, background drawing data creation processing is executed in step S1010. In the drawing data creation process for the background, the drawing data for the background is created by performing projection onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the backmost image and the object set as the background image.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144. The screen buffer 144 has a background buffer in which drawing data for background is written, and drawing data and design for rendering. An effect and a design buffer in which drawing data for writing are collectively written are set. In addition, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the background buffer, the effect, and the design buffer. The background drawing data created in step S1010 is written into the background buffer. If no background image data is specified in the drawing list, no background drawing data is created.

  In the subsequent step S1011, drawing data creation processing for effects and symbols is executed. In the rendering data creation process for effects and symbols, the screen buffer is obtained by projecting the object set as the effect image and the object set as the pattern onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal. The rendering data for the effect and the symbol is created in the buffer for the effect and the symbol in 144. If the image data for effects and symbols is not specified in the drawing list, the rendering data for effects and symbols is not created.

  Thereafter, in step S1012, the drawing data composition process is executed, and then the drawing process is terminated. In the drawing data combining process in step S1012, the drawing data for background and the drawing data for effects and symbols created in the screen buffer 144 individually by the processes in step S1010 and step S1011 are combined. The composite result is written as drawing data for one frame in the drawing target frame regions 142a and 142b.

  In this case, the order of writing is defined to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of background drawing data → effect and symbol drawing data. Therefore, the drawing data for background is first written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for effects and symbols is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be rendered, the back image is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. Fusion of the back side image and the near side image at the reference ratio is performed, and when the non-transparent α value is set, the near side image is overwritten with the back side image. Then, the fusion operation is executed.

Here, the fusion calculation will be described in more detail. The RGB numerical value information of each dot in the drawing target frame regions 142a and 142b is set to the pixel that is the drawing target in the rendering data for the effects and symbols. Based on the α value that is
R: “R value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “R value of front side image” × “α value”
G: “G value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “G value of front side image” × “α value”
B: “B value of back side image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “B value of front side image” × “α value”
It becomes.

  Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion that is not projected in the rendering data for effects and symbols.

  The drawing data for one frame is generated so as to be completed within a 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 31 based on the created drawing data. Since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data for one frame after that frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to every time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. By the switching by the selector circuit, the drawing data The frame regions 142a and 142b that are the drawing targets are restricted so as not to be output targets for outputting image signals.

  Steps S1002 to S1007 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and steps S1008 to S1012 are processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Mask display using Z buffer 143>
Next, mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  As already described, the Z buffer 143 is used when performing hidden surface removal by the Z buffer method. Here, the hidden surface process using the Z buffer executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The hidden surface process using the Z buffer is activated in each drawing data creation process in steps S1010 and S1011 in the drawing process (FIG. 16) when the Z test is designated in the drawing list. Further, when performing the Z test designation, the display CPU 131 sets the Z axis of the screen area PC12 serving as a reference in the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer so as to be parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate system. A pixel to be displayed is determined between pixels arranged in a direction parallel to the Z-axis direction.

  In the background drawing data creation process in step S1010, the back image and the background object are targets for hidden surface processing, and in the rendering and design drawing data creation process in step S1011, the rendering object and design object are used. This object is the target of hidden surface processing. Further, in the hidden surface process in the rendering data and drawing data creation process for the effect, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion in which neither the effect object nor the pattern object is set.

  Only one Z buffer 143 is set, and it has an area with the same number of dots as the background buffer in the screen buffer 144 and an area with the same number of dots as the production and design buffer. doing.

  First, in step S1101, with respect to the current projection target dot in the screen region PC12 (see FIG. 17), the individual image included on the Z-axis, and the target pixel of the individual image that is the current test target. The set Z value is grasped. In the subsequent step S1102, the Z value set in the area of the dot corresponding one-to-one with the drawing target dot in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S1103, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S1101 corresponds to the near side in the Z-axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S1102. If it corresponds to the near side, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the Z value obtained in step S1101 is overwritten on the area of the dot referenced in step S1102 in the Z buffer 143. In subsequent step S1105, the numerical information for drawing such as the color information set for the pixel referred to in step S1101 is overwritten in the drawing target buffer in the screen buffer 144 in the area of the current projection target dot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that it does not correspond to the near side, the process proceeds to step S1106 without executing the processes in steps S1104 to S1105. That is, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot of the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is updated. In addition, the numerical value information for drawing already set is held as it is. On the other hand, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is closer to the Z-axis direction than the Z value already set in the target dot of the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated. The numerical information for drawing is also updated.

  In step S1106, it is determined whether or not the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z-axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S1101 to perform a Z test on the new target pixel.

  If completed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the Z test has been completed for all dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S1108, and then the process returns to step S1101 to perform a Z test on the new projection target dot. If completed, the hidden surface process is terminated.

  By executing the hidden surface process as described above, even if a plurality of individual images are arranged on the Z-axis, only the individual images closer to the viewpoint are displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, masking of the background character (that is, partial display) is executed using the hidden surface processing. This masking is performed by setting the Z value of the object for masking in the display CPU 131.

  Hereinafter, the mask calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The mask calculation process is the same as the background calculation process in step S903 in the task process (FIG. 14) when it is indicated that the mask calculation process should be executed on the area referred to in the data table. Executed.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the current processing time corresponds to the first mask display based on the currently set data table. Here, the first mask display and the second mask display are set as the mask display. The first mask display is a display mode in which the state in which the character is partially displayed is maintained over a plurality of frames, and the second mask display is a plurality of frames in which pixels are masked from the state in which the entire character is displayed. It is a display mode that gradually increases over time and finally disappears.

  If it corresponds to the first mask display, in step S1202, the mask target object is grasped based on the currently set data table. In the subsequent step S1203, the pixel to be masked in the object grasped in step S1202 is grasped based on the currently set data table.

  Then, after executing the Z value setting process in step S1204, the present calculation process is terminated. In the setting process of the Z value, for the pixel that is the mask target in the object, the Z value is set to be on the back side of the backmost image, and for the pixel that is not the mask target, The Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the rearmost image.

  As described above, the mask calculation process is executed, and a drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135. Thus, the VDP 135 uses a Z buffer as a hidden surface process. The hidden surface process (FIG. 18) is executed, and finally the first mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific contents of the first mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 20 shows a three-dimensional image as a two-dimensional image.

  FIG. 20A shows a case where the character CH1 is displayed as usual without performing the first mask display. 20 (a-1) is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. 20 (a-2) is a diagram on the display surface G. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20 (a-1), since the Z value is set so that each pixel is closer to the front side than the backmost image, as shown in FIG. 20 (a-2). The character CH1 is displayed in its entirety.

  FIG. 20B shows a case where the first mask display is performed. FIG. 20B-1 is an image diagram of the Z value designated by the display CPU 131 for each pixel of the object PC 13 corresponding to the character CH1, and FIG. A display mode is shown. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20 (b-1), the Z value is set to be nearer than the rearmost image in a part of each pixel, but the remaining pixels are the rearmost. The Z value is set so as to be behind the image. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 20 (b-2), the character CH1 is displayed only at the portion corresponding to the pixel for which the Z value is set so as to be on the near side.

  Note that a plurality of Z value setting patterns corresponding to the first mask display for the same character CH1 may be set by the control program of the display CPU 131. In this case, a plurality of types of first mask display modes can be set for the same character CH1.

  Returning to the description of the mask processing (FIG. 19), if it is determined in step S1201 that the current processing time does not correspond to the first mask display, the current processing time is the second mask. Since this means that the display is supported, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, based on the currently set data table, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the second mask display.

  If it is the start timing, an object to be masked is grasped based on the currently set data table in step S1206. In the subsequent step S1207, the dedicated mask table is read based on the currently set data table. This dedicated table for masking is stored and held until the current second mask display is completed. In the subsequent step S1208, the pixels set as the initial erasure target in the mask dedicated table are grasped.

  Thereafter, the Z value setting process is executed in step S1209, and then this calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, in the above object, the pixel that is grasped as the initial erasure target in step S1208 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the backmost image. For the pixels that are not, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the rearmost image.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1205 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, the erasure target counter set in the work RAM 132 is updated. In subsequent step S1211, data corresponding to the value of the erase target counter updated in step S1210 is confirmed in the dedicated mask table that is currently read, and the erase target pixel is grasped.

  Thereafter, the Z value setting process is executed in step S1212, and then this calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, in the object, the pixel that is recognized as the erasure target in step S1211 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the rearmost image, and is not to be erased. For non-existing pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the backmost image.

  As described above, the mask calculation process is executed, and a drawing list including the object for which the Z value is set as a drawing target is transmitted to the VDP 135. Thus, the VDP 135 uses a Z buffer as a hidden surface process. The hidden surface processing (FIG. 18) is executed, and finally the second mask display is performed on the display surface G. The specific contents of the second mask display will be described with reference to FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 21 shows a three-dimensional image as a two-dimensional image.

  FIG. 21A shows an image diagram of information set in the mask dedicated table, and FIG. 21B shows a case where the character CH2 is displayed as usual without performing the second mask display. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the object PC 14 corresponding to the character CH2 has a plurality of pixels. In the dedicated table for masking, the plurality of pixels are grouped in groups and each group is divided into groups. On the other hand, the frame order to be erased is set. Specifically, the group indicated as “a1” is set as the initial erasure target, and thereafter, the group indicated as “a2” → the group indicated as “a3” → the group indicated as “a4” → “a5”. It will be deleted in the group order.

  In the frame in which the second mask display is started and the group indicated as “a1” is an erasing target, the pixel portion corresponding to the group “a1” is missing as shown in FIG. Character CH2 is displayed. In the subsequent frame, when the group indicated as “a2” is to be erased, as shown in FIG. 21D, in addition to the “a1” group, the pixels corresponding to the “a2” group. Character CH2 is displayed with the portion missing. Then, the character CH2 is not displayed in the frame in which the group indicated as “a5” is finally the erasure target.

  As described above, the object can be masked using the Z buffer 143. Further, according to this configuration, it is only necessary to perform a masking operation on the program of the display CPU 131, and it is not necessary to set mask data which is a kind of image data in the VDP 135. Therefore, mask display can be performed without increasing the storage capacity necessary for storing image data.

  In addition, since the display CPU 131 only needs to adjust the Z value of each object, the mask display can be performed without increasing the processing load of the display CPU 131 so much. In addition, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved by using a plurality of types of mask displays such as the first mask display and the second mask display.

  Further, a Z value on the back side with respect to the rearmost image is set in a non-display portion. Since the rearmost image is an image that always forms the rear surface in any frame, it is an absolute reference for the position in the Z-axis (depth direction). By setting the Z value of the portion to be hidden based on this, it becomes possible to make the setting manner of the Z value in the case of non-display uniform, and the processing relating to the setting of the Z value The processing load can be reduced.

  Note that only one of the first mask display and the second mask display may be set. Further, in the second mask display, the pixel may be erased for each pixel instead of being erased for each of the plurality of pixels, and the pixel to be erased may be set as the display object again. It is good.

  In addition, by reversely setting the Z value, characters are not sequentially erased over a display period for a plurality of frames, but are displayed so that characters appear sequentially over a display period for a plurality of frames. It is good also as a structure to be made.

<Another Form of Mask Processing Using Z Buffer 143>
Another form of mask display using the Z buffer 143 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing another form of the mask calculation processing executed by the display CPU 131.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether it is a start timing based on the currently set data table. If it is the start timing, in step S1302, the mask target object is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1303, the initial setting is performed based on the currently set data table. Read the mask table.

  In subsequent step S1304, a mask lottery process is executed. In the mask lottery process, the numerical information currently set in the lottery counter provided in the work RAM 132 is read, and the information to be erased corresponding to the numerical information is extracted from the initial mask table read in step S1303. .

  The lottery counter is configured to be updated every time the process of step S702 is executed in the main process (FIG. 12), for example, and when the counter value makes one round, the initial value is selected at random. It becomes the composition which is done. Further, in the initial mask table, information to be erased is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each counter value of the lottery counter, and the information to be erased includes all the pixels constituting the mask target object. Among these, a plurality of pixels are grouped as one group, and correspond to each group on a one-to-one basis.

  In subsequent step S1305, the pixel to be erased is grasped from the information to be erased acquired in step S1304. Thereafter, the Z value setting process is executed in step S1306, and then this calculation process is terminated. In the Z value setting process, in the object, the pixel that is grasped as the erasure target in step S1305 is set so that the Z value is on the back side of the backmost image and is not to be erased. For non-existing pixels, the Z value is set so as to correspond to the position to be originally displayed on the near side of the backmost image.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1301 that it is not the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, the mask table is rewritten so that the information to be erased that has already been set as the erase target is excluded from the already read initial mask table. For example, the counter value corresponding to the information to be erased that has already been set as the object to be erased is rewritten so as to be assigned to other information to be erased. This assignment may be performed at random, or may be configured to be assigned to information to be erased corresponding to the counter value immediately below in the table.

  Thereafter, the processing of step S1304 to step S1306 is executed using the mask table rewritten in step S1307, and then the calculation processing is terminated.

  As described above, according to this different mode, pixels to be erased are selected at random, so that the mask display mode can be diversified.

  Note that the mask display using the Z buffer 143 may be applied not to the character for the background but to the character or design for presentation. For example, when applied to a character for presentation, the hidden surface processing is collectively performed on the image data for background and the image data for presentation, so that the rearmost surface is similar to the above configuration. The Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed with reference to the Z value of the image. In addition, when applied to symbols, the hidden surface processing is performed on the image data for background, the image data for presentation, and the image data for symbols in the same manner as in the above configuration. The Z values of the display target and the non-display target may be sorted based on the Z value of the rearmost image.

  Further, even when the hidden surface processing is performed individually for the background, the effect, and the design, it is determined that the pixel for which the Z value on the back side of the backmost image is set in the VDP 135 is not to be rendered. If it is, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target may be distributed with reference to the Z value of the backmost image as in the above configuration.

  In addition, the Z value of the display target and the non-display target is not distributed based on the Z value of the rearmost image, but, for example, the Z value in front of the viewpoint is set as the Z value of the non-display target. The Z value on the back side from the viewpoint may be set as the Z value to be displayed.

  Further, the hidden surface processing using the Z buffer 143 may be performed not on the basis of the Z axis of the world coordinate system but on the basis of the direction of the viewpoint.

<Configuration related to display mode switching>
Next, a configuration related to display mode switching will be described.

  As described above, the display mode is a state in which the standby image displayed until the game turn is started and the type of the game turn image displayed in the situation where the game turn is executed are set to a predetermined type. A plurality of display modes are set. Specifically, a first display mode and a second display mode are set.

  The display mode of the background image and the display mode of each symbol are different between the first display mode and the second display mode. Specifically, when comparing symbols with the same number, the outer shape and shape of the symbols are the same in the first display mode and the second display mode, but the colors and patterns are different. As for the background image, the first display mode and the second display mode are different in the type of the rearmost image, and the number and type of characters displayed in front of the rearmost image are different. More characters are displayed in the first display mode than in the second display mode.

  The display mode is switched based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. Specifically, the display mode is sequentially switched by operating the production operation device 48 in a situation where the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed. In addition, switching is performed based on the operation of the presentation operating device 48 under a predetermined condition in a situation where game times are being executed.

  A specific processing configuration relating to switching of the display mode will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an operation generation command response process executed by the display CPU 131. The operation occurrence command handling process is executed in the command handling process in step S803 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 13).

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not an operation generation command for mode switching is received from the sound emission control device 60. If it has not been received, the operation command handling process is terminated as it is. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, it is determined whether it is the first switchable period. The first switchable period is a period in which neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Information for specifying whether it is the first switchable period is set in the data table. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not it is the first switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is the first switchable period, a first switch execution flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1403.

  On the other hand, if it is not the first switchable period, the process advances to step S1404 to determine whether it is the second switchable period. The second switchable period is a period from the start timing to a predetermined reference timing in the middle of execution in a situation where game times are being executed. Specifically, when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 31, the symbol variation display in all symbol sequences SA1 to SA3 is started → high-speed variation display in all symbol sequences SA1 to SA3 → low-speed variation This includes a display flow of sequentially stopping each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 via the display. In this case, the second switchable period is a period from the start of the symbol variation display in all symbol sequences SA1 to SA3 to the timing when the high-speed variation display in all symbol sequences SA1 to SA3 ends.

  In addition, the variation display mode of the symbol starts the variation display of the symbols in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 → the acceleration period of all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 → the high-speed variation display in all the symbol columns SA1 to SA3 (the high speed is constant) (Speed) → low-speed fluctuation display (low speed is a constant speed), the display sequence of sequential stop of each symbol row SA1 to SA3 may be used. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period in which the high-speed fluctuation display is executed in all the symbol rows SA1 to SA3.

  Further, a medium speed fluctuation display may be included between the high speed fluctuation display and the low speed fluctuation display. In other words, the number of specific steps is arbitrary as long as the pattern variation display mode is switched in a plurality of steps such as two steps, three steps, or four steps or more. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period of a low-identification stage in which a player has low symbol discrimination among the stages.

  In addition, a specific variation mode is arbitrary as long as it includes a state of variation display in a relatively low discrimination mode → variation display in a high discrimination mode in the flow of symbol variation display, for example, any mode. However, the fluctuation speed is the same, but in the fluctuation display in the low discrimination mode, the pattern is displayed in a state of being transparent, translucent, hollow or partly removed, and in the fluctuation display in the high discrimination mode, the entire pattern is displayed. It may be configured to be displayed. In this case, the second switchable period may be a period during which the variable display in the low identification mode is performed.

  Information for specifying whether or not it is the second switchable period is set in the data table. In step S1404, it is determined whether or not it is the second switchable period based on the currently set data table. . If it is determined that the period is not the second switchable period, the operation occurrence command response process is terminated as it is, and if it is the second switchable period, a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1405. Is set to the second switching execution flag.

  After executing any one of steps S1403 and S1405, the process proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, the display mode counter is updated.

  The display mode counter is a counter for specifying the current display mode by the display CPU 131, and is provided in the work RAM 132. The counter for the display mode is set with a counter value corresponding to each display mode on a one-to-one basis. In the present embodiment, since the first display mode and the second display mode are set as the display mode as described above, a numerical value of “0” corresponding to the first display mode and the second display are set as the counter value. A numerical value “1” corresponding to the mode is set. In this case, since the initial value of the display mode counter is set to “0”, when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 131 is started or when the pachinko machine 10 is reset, the first value is displayed. One display mode is set.

  In step S1406, the display mode counter is updated so that the display mode is sequentially switched in accordance with a predetermined order each time the effect operating device 48 is operated once. Specifically, when the process of step S1406 is executed in a situation where the display mode counter is “0” and the first display mode is set, the second display mode counter is set to “1”. When the process is switched to the display mode and the process of step S1406 is executed in the situation where the display mode counter is “1” and the second display mode is set, the display mode counter is set to “1”. Switch to 1 display mode. After executing the process of step S1406, the operation occurrence command response process is terminated.

  Next, the display mode background calculation processing executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The calculation process for the display mode background is executed in the background calculation process in step S903 in the task process (FIG. 14). In addition, when executing a jackpot effect, the background image corresponding to the display mode is not displayed, so the calculation processing for the display mode background is not executed, and when the standby image is displayed or when the effect for game times is executed The calculation process for the display mode background is executed.

  In step S1501, a display mode counter provided in the work RAM 132 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the display mode is the first display mode. If it is in the first display mode, in step S1502, the first backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1503, various parameters of the grasped first rearmost image are calculated, and the control information is updated. In subsequent step S1504, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the first display mode and an object to be updated for background is grasped. In subsequent step S1505, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated, and the control information is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is the second display mode, in step S1506, the second backmost image to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. In subsequent step S1507, various parameters of the grasped second rearmost image are calculated, and the control information is updated. In subsequent step S1508, based on the currently set data table, an object corresponding to the second display mode and an object to be updated for background is grasped. In subsequent step S1509, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated, and the control information is updated.

  Note that, at the execution timing of the process in step S1502, the control start setting process (step S901) for the first back-most image and the background object corresponding to the first display mode is completed. Also, at the execution timing of the process in step S1506, the control start setting process (step S901) for the background object corresponding to the second rearmost image and the second display mode is completed.

  After executing the processing in step S1505 or step S1509, it is determined in step S1510 whether either the first switching execution flag or the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132. If any switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the processing load is high.

  The situation where the processing load is large is that the processing load of the VDP 135 is so large that the processing drop occurs when both the geometry calculation and the rendering for the image data specified in the current drawing list are executed by the VDP 135. This means a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is relatively large even if no drop occurs. Information regarding whether or not the processing load is large is determined in the data table, and the determination in step S1511 is performed based on the information.

  If the processing load is not high, it is determined in step S1512 whether the background image corresponding to the current display mode has been stored separately. Here, the separate saving means that the drawing data for background for displaying the background image corresponding to each display mode is individually saved and the saved state is maintained. In the separate storage, the mode buffer 145 provided in the VRAM 134 is used (see FIG. 4).

  The mode buffer 145 displays a first mode area 145a in which background drawing data for displaying a background image corresponding to the first display mode is written, and a background image corresponding to the second display mode. And a second mode area 145b in which the background drawing data is written. Also, the VDP 135 reads the background drawing data into either the first mode area 145a or the second mode area 145b and reads the written background drawing data into the screen buffer 144. A display mode control unit 154 having a writing function.

  If it has not been saved separately, the execution designation information of another save is stored in step S1513, and then this calculation process is terminated. If it has been saved separately, this calculation process is terminated as it is.

  When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process includes the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Information on the instruction to use the image data is set. In addition, when the process in step S1513 is being executed, execution information for separate storage is set. The separate save execution designation information includes information indicating that the separate save is to be executed, and also includes information on the address of the separate save destination.

  On the other hand, if the processing load is large (step S1511: YES), it is determined in step S1514 whether the background image in the display mode of the switching destination has been stored separately. If it has not been saved separately, this calculation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has been stored separately, the use designation information of the separately stored data is stored in step S1515, and then this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for the display mode background is executed as described above, the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output process includes the background corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode. Information on the instruction to use the image data is set. In addition, when the process of step S1515 is being executed, use specification information of another saved data is set. The use specification information of the separate storage data includes information indicating that the separate storage data should be used, and also includes information on an address where the separate storage data is stored.

  Next, the symbol calculation process executed by the display CPU 131 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The symbol calculation process is executed in step S905 of the task process (FIG. 14).

  First, in step S1601, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether or not it is necessary to execute control update processing for the symbol. A case where a jackpot effect is being executed is included as a case where it is not necessary to execute, and a case where an effect for game times is being executed and a case where a standby image is displayed are included as a case where it is necessary to execute. If there is no need to execute, the symbol calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is necessary to execute it, in step S1602, whether or not the game is being executed based on the currently set data table. Determine whether or not.

  If the game times are not being executed, it is determined in step S1603 whether the first switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132 or not. If the first switching execution flag is set, in step S1604, the symbol to be controlled is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. Specifically, the information of the symbol to be controlled (for example, information on the stored address) is held while maintaining the parameter information of each free buffer area secured in performing the symbol control in the work RAM 132. Is replaced with information corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination. Note that the processing in steps S1603 and S1604 may be executed in the control start setting processing (step S901) in the task processing (FIG. 14). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, the first switching execution flag is cleared.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603 or if the process of step S1604 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1606, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation process is terminated.

  When the symbol calculation processing is executed as described above, the symbol image data corresponding to either the first display mode or the second display mode is included in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing. Information on the use instruction is set.

  If the game is being executed (step S1602: YES), it is determined in step S1607 whether or not high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all symbol sequences SA1 to SA3 based on the currently set data table. judge. If the high-speed fluctuation display is being performed in all the symbol sequences SA1 to SA3, it is determined in step S1608 whether or not the second switching execution flag is set in the work RAM 132.

  If the second switching execution flag is set, it is determined in step S1609 whether the control target symbol can be changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination. This is because, when the drawing process corresponding to the current drawing list (FIG. 16) is executed by the VDP 135, if the control target symbol is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination, a process drop occurs. Based on whether or not a process failure occurs, it can be changed, and if a process failure occurs, it is determined that it cannot be changed.

  For example, when background image data corresponding to switching of the display mode is newly set in the current drawing list, it is necessary to newly reset the image data setting in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. The processing load on the VDP 135 is increased. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol cannot be changed. On the other hand, when other saved data is set as background image data in the current drawing list, or when background image data corresponding to the same display mode as the display mode related to the previous drawing list is set In the VDP 135, it is not necessary to newly set the image data to the world coordinate system, so that the processing load on the VDP 135 is relatively small. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the symbol can be changed.

  Information about whether or not the change can be made is defined in the data table, and the determination in step S1609 is performed based on the information. Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, the second switching execution flag is cleared.

  If it is determined in step S1609 that it can be changed, the control target symbol is changed in accordance with the display mode of the switching destination in step S1610. The specific content of this process is the same as that in step S1604. After executing the process of step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1613.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the change cannot be made, a change standby flag is set for a predetermined area provided in the work RAM 132 in step S1611, and then the process proceeds to step S1613. . The change waiting flag is a flag for the display CPU 131 to specify that the change of the symbol to be controlled is on standby. If the change standby flag is set, even if it is determined in step S1608 that the second switching execution flag is not set, the process in step S1609 is performed by executing the process in step S1612. Executed. If both the second switching execution flag and the change waiting flag are not set, the process proceeds to step S1613. The change waiting flag is cleared when an affirmative determination is made in step S1612.

  In step S1613, based on the currently set data table, the symbol object to be controlled is grasped, and in step S1614, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation process is terminated.

  When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes an instruction to use the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set. In this case, if it is determined in step S1609 that the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the information on the instruction to use the image data of the symbol corresponding to the switching source display mode remains as it is. Set to the drawing list. As a result, a symbol that does not correspond to the display mode is finally displayed on the display surface G. However, since the timing at which the second switching execution flag is set is being displayed at high speed, the player changes the above state. Cannot be recognized or difficult to recognize.

  If the symbol cannot be changed to the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination, the change standby flag is set, and the change is performed in the subsequent processing times. Thereby, it is possible to satisfactorily switch the display mode while preventing the processing drop in the VDP 135. Note that the processing load of the VDP 135 is adjusted so that the symbol corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination is changed within the range where the high-speed fluctuation display is performed.

  If high-speed fluctuation display is not being performed (step S1607: NO), the process proceeds to step S1615. In step S1615, the object of the symbol to be controlled is grasped based on the currently set data table, and in step S1616, various parameters of the object are calculated and updated. Thereafter, the symbol calculation process is terminated. When the symbol calculation process is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes an instruction to use the image data for the symbol corresponding to the first display mode or the second display mode. Is set.

  Next, background setting processing executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background setting process is executed in step S1002 in the drawing process (FIG. 16).

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not use designation of another saved data is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S1702, information for setting another saved data corresponding to the designation as drawing data for the background is stored in the register 153.

  If not set (step S1701: NO) or after executing the process of step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, the rearmost image specified in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1704, various parameters designated for the rearmost image are grasped. Thereafter, in step S1705, setting processing for the world coordinate system is executed for the rearmost image. The contents relating to this setting are as described above.

  In subsequent step S1706, the background object designated in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S1707, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. After that, in step S1708, after setting processing for the object in the world coordinate system is executed, the setting processing for the background is ended.

  By executing the setting process for the background as described above, drawing is performed not only in the situation where the use designation of the other saved data is not set, but also in the situation where the use designation of the other saved data is set. The image data specified in the list can be set in the world coordinate system. Accordingly, for example, when the current drawing list relates to display mode switching, setting for starting control of image data corresponding to the display mode of the switching destination can be performed.

  Next, background drawing data creation processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The background drawing data creation process is executed in step S1010 of the drawing process (FIG. 16).

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not use setting information for another saved data is set in the register 153. If not set, in step S1802, hidden surface processing is executed to create background drawing data in the screen buffer 144. The hidden surface processing is as already described.

  In a succeeding step S1803, it is determined whether or not another save execution designation is set in the current drawing list. If it is not set, the drawing data creation process is terminated. If set, in step S1804, the background mode created in step S1802 is transferred to the target mode area in the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Write drawing data. As a result, background drawing data is stored separately. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that the use setting information for the other saved data is set in the register 153, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, the other storage data is read from the mode area designated this time out of the first mode area 145a and the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145, and the read other storage data is stored in the current buffer. The drawing data for the background is written in the screen buffer 144. Thereafter, the drawing data creation process ends.

  By executing the drawing data creation process for the background as described above, the drawing data for the background through the geometry calculation and rendering, or the drawing data for the background related to the other saved data is stored in the screen buffer 144. . In addition, in the frame in which an image corresponding to each display mode is displayed, the rendering data for the effect and the design is created (step S1011), and the rendering data for the effect and the design is created. Drawing data composition processing (step S1012) is executed, and drawing data for one frame is created.

  Here, the timing at which the separate storage data for the first display mode and the separate storage data for the second display mode are created will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 28A shows background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode, and FIG. 28B shows background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode. FIG. 28 (a) shows the power on / off state of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 28 (b) shows the presence / absence of the first display mode, and FIG. 28 (c) shows the presence / absence of the second display mode. FIG. 28 (d) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the first display mode, and FIG. 28 (e) shows the presence / absence of separate storage data for the second display mode.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on at the timing t1, power supply to the display CPU 131 is started, and the display CPU 131 starts processing. In addition, since the display mode is set to the first display mode, a drawing list is output from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 in order to display an image corresponding to the first display mode at a timing later than the timing t1. Further, creation of drawing data corresponding to the first display mode is started in the VDP 135 based on the drawing list.

  After that, at the timing of t2, the creation of the background drawing data PD1 corresponding to the first display mode is completed, so that the drawing data is stored in the first mode of the mode buffer 145 as another saved data for the first display mode. Stored in the use area 145a. In the background image by the drawing data PD1 for the background corresponding to the first display mode, as shown in FIG. 28A, a three-dimensional character indicated by “A” to “F” in front of the rearmost image. An image is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the first mode area 145a is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued. In addition, the display of the image corresponding to the first display mode is started at the timing t2 or a predetermined timing thereafter.

  Thereafter, the display mode is switched from the first display mode to the second display mode based on the operation of the effect operating device 48 at the timing t3. Then, drawing data for the second display mode is created, and display of an image corresponding to the second display mode is started. Further, since the creation of the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode is completed at the timing, the drawing data is stored as another saved data for the second display mode in the second mode area 145b of the mode buffer 145. Is remembered. In the background image based on the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 28B, a three-dimensional character indicated by “G” to “J” in front of the rearmost image. An image is displayed. Further, the separately stored data stored in the second mode area 145b is stored and held while the power supply to the VRAM 134 is continued.

  Here, the drawing data PD1 for the background corresponding to the first display mode has a larger number of objects set than the drawing data PD2 for the background corresponding to the second display mode. Then, when switching from the second display mode to the first display mode is performed in a situation where the processing load of the VDP 135 is large, there is a concern that a processing drop may occur in the VDP 135. On the other hand, among the two separate storage data, the separate storage data for the first display mode is created using the time during which the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on, which increases the processing load. When the display mode is switched to the first display mode depending on the situation, it is possible to avoid the processing failure by using the separately stored data.

  On the other hand, even if the drawing data PD2 for background corresponding to the second display mode has a low processing load on the VDP 135 for creation and is switched to the second display mode in a situation where the processing load on the VDP 135 is large, It is set so that processing loss does not occur. However, when the background drawing data PD2 corresponding to the second display mode is also stored separately, and the processing load is relatively high even when the processing drop does not occur, switching to the second display mode is performed. The separately stored data is used for the.

  As shown in the timings t4 to t9, when the separate storage data is created as described above, when the display mode is switched repeatedly in a short time, the separate storage data is stored in each display mode. By using the background image to display it, it is possible to prevent the processing from being lost.

  In addition, another storage target is a background image, and does not include an individual image that is subject to variation such as a design. As a result, when the display mode is switched in a situation where the individual image is fluctuating, the movement of the individual image whose fluctuation is noticed is continued even if the image using the separately stored data is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  The display mode is not limited to two stages, and may be set to three stages or four or more stages. Even in this case, it is possible to satisfactorily switch display modes by separately storing background drawing data corresponding to each display mode.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is performed without waiting for the switching of the kind of symbol irrespective of the switching timing of a display mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which a design does not differ between display modes.

  In addition, the effect character may be switched depending on the display mode. In this case, the effect character may be configured not to be stored separately, or may be configured to be stored separately.

<Configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image using a connected object>
Next, a configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image using a connected object will be described.

  The connected object is a unit object in which a plurality of part objects (partial objects) are connected with a connecting part as a joint. In order to give movement to a character in a three-dimensional image by relatively displacing each part object Is set. By using the connected object, the character of the three-dimensional image can be smoothly operated. In view of the fact that the connected object has a skeleton part and a joint part, it can also be called a bone model.

  The connected object is set to display a character that performs a predetermined action. Here, in this embodiment, multiple types of connected objects for displaying a common character are set. The plurality of types of connected objects will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, in order to display a common character, a first connected object PC15 and a second connected object PC16 are set. Each of the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 has a plurality of connected portions CT1 and CT2, but the connected portions CT1 and CT2 are set at different locations.

  Specifically, the first connected object PC15 is not provided with a connecting portion at the knee portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT1 at the elbow portion, as shown in FIGS. 29 (a-1) and 29 (a-2). The operation as shown can be displayed. On the other hand, the second connected object PC16 is not provided with a connecting portion at the elbow portion, but is provided with a connecting portion CT2 at the knee portion, as shown in FIGS. 29 (b-1) and 29 (b-2). The operation can be displayed. As described above, since the connecting portions are set at different places, it is possible to cause the character to perform different actions when the first connected object PC15 is used and when the second connected object PC16 is used. It becomes.

  Although both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location, the connecting objects CT1 and CT2 may not have the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 at a common location. Further, a common texture is mapped to both the connected objects PC15 and PC16, but a configuration may be adopted in which textures are set individually. If it is possible to cause the character to perform different actions by preparing a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16, the positions of the connecting portions CT1 and CT2 and the character type are arbitrary.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying a state in which a character is moving using both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 will be described.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for connected objects executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the connected object is executed in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). The calculation process for the connected object is activated when a data table corresponding to a game time in which an effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is executed is set.

  First, in step S1901, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether an effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (the character is being displayed). If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S1902 whether it is the start timing of the effect using the linked objects PC15 and PC16. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, the start specification information of the connected object effect is stored, and in the subsequent step S1904, based on the currently set data table, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as control targets. To do. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process in step S1904, the control start process is completed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). The control information for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the current series of effects using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is completed.

  In subsequent step S1905, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated, and the control information related to the first connected object PC15 is updated. In step S1906, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated, and the control information related to the second connected object PC16 is updated.

  In subsequent step S1907, designation information of the first effect period is stored. Here, the effects using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 are divided into a plurality of effect periods, specifically, a first effect period, a second effect period, and a third effect period. In the first effect period and the third effect period, the character is displayed using the first connected object PC15, and in the second effect period, the character is displayed using the second connected object PC16. Thereafter, in step S1908, the parameters of the first connected object PC15 out of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set to be specified in the current drawing list.

  In subsequent step S1909, based on the currently set data table, the other objects for the first presentation period and the object to be updated this time are grasped. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process in step S1909, the control start process for the current update target object is completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). Thereafter, in step S1910, the various parameters of the other objects ascertained are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated. Then, the calculation process ends.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, use instruction information for both linked objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. The parameters of the first linked object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Moreover, the start specification information of the connected object effect indicating that the effect using the connected objects PC15 and PC16 should be started and the specification information of the first effect period indicating that it is the first effect period are set in the drawing list. Is done.

  On the other hand, when an effect using the linked objects PC15 and PC16 is being executed (step S1901: YES), whether or not the first effect period is in effect based on the currently set data table in step S1911. Determine whether or not. If it is during the first presentation period, the processing of step S1904 to step S1910 is executed, and then the calculation processing is terminated. Incidentally, since this time is in the first production period, the first connected object PC15 performs a predetermined first action (see FIG. 29A) as the first production period progresses. In step S1905, the parameter is calculated.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, use instruction information for both linked objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. The parameters of the first linked object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. In addition, designation information of the first effect period indicating the first effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S1911 that it is not during the first effect period, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not it is during the second effect period based on the currently set data table. If it is during the second presentation period, in step S1913, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In a succeeding step S1914, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated, and the control information related to the first connected object PC15 is updated. In step S1915, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated, and the control information related to the second connected object PC16 is updated. Incidentally, since this time is in the second production period, the second linked object PC16 performs a predetermined second action (see FIG. 29B) as the second production period progresses. In step S1915, the parameter is calculated.

  In the subsequent step S1916, the designation information of the second effect period is stored, and in step S1917, the parameter of the second connected object PC16 among the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is specified in the current drawing list. Set.

  In the subsequent step S1918, based on the currently set data table, the other objects for the second effect period and the object to be updated this time are grasped. Here, the second effect period is a state in which the effect is developed more than the first effect period, and the number of objects displayed at least when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is increased. The setting process for starting control (step S901) for the object that has been increased when switching from the first effect period to the second effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1918. Thereafter, in step S1919, the various parameters of the other objects ascertained are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated. Then, the calculation process ends.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, use instruction information for both linked objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. The parameters of the second linked object PC16 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. In addition, designation information of the second effect period indicating the second effect period is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S1912 that it is not during the second effect period, the process proceeds to step S1920 because it means the third effect period. In step S1920, the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In subsequent step S1921, various parameters of the first connected object PC15 are calculated, and the control information related to the first connected object PC15 is updated. Incidentally, since this time is in the third effect period, the first linked object PC15 performs a predetermined first action (see FIG. 29A) as the third effect period progresses. In step S1921, the parameter is calculated. In step S1922, various parameters of the second connected object PC16 are calculated, and the control information related to the second connected object PC16 is updated.

  In subsequent step S1923, designation information of the third effect period is stored, and in step S1924, the parameter of the first connected object PC15 out of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 is specified in the current drawing list. Set.

  In subsequent step S1925, based on the currently set data table, another object for the third effect period and the object to be updated this time is grasped. Here, the third effect period is a state in which the effect is developed more than the second effect period, and the number of objects displayed at least when switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is increased. The setting process for starting control (step S901) for the object that has been increased during the switching from the second effect period to the third effect period is completed at the execution timing of the process of step S1925. After that, in step S1926, the various parameters of the other objects ascertained are calculated, and the control information related to these other objects is updated. Then, the calculation process ends.

  When the calculation process for the linked object is executed as described above, use instruction information for both linked objects PC15 and PC16 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process. The parameters of the first linked object PC15 are set for the objects PC15 and PC16. Also, designation information for the third effect period indicating the third effect period is set in the drawing list.

  Next, the connection object effect setting process executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The connection object effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process in step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). The setting process for the connected object effect is activated when either the start specification of the connected object effect or the specification of the first effect period to the third effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the start specification of the connected object effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2002, based on the current drawing list, the memory module 133 grasps the address where the first linked object PC15 is stored, and determines the first linked object PC15. read out. In step S2003, based on the current drawing list, the memory module 133 grasps the address where the second connected object PC16 is stored, and reads out the second connected object PC16.

  In the subsequent step S2004, a uniform α value setting process for the first effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “1” that is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “0” that is the completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the color information set in advance for all the pixels of the first connected object PC15 (including information on the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is. An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the two connected objects PC16.

  In the subsequent step S2005, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list are grasped as parameters of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16. Thereafter, in step S2006, a setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  Since this time is a processing time related to the start specification of the connected object effect, the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged in the world coordinate system. Further, the shapes of the two linked objects PC15 and PC16 are substantially the same, but the linked portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if an attempt is made to apply the parameters of the first connected object PC15 to the second connected object PC16 as they are, pixels whose coordinate designations do not match are generated, but for such pixels, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In the following step S2007, other objects for the first effect period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and various parameters designated for the object are grasped in step S2008. Thereafter, in step S2009, the setting process for the connected object effect is ended after executing the setting process for the object in the world coordinate system.

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the arrangement of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 with respect to the world coordinate system is started simultaneously. Further, since the same parameter is applied to both connected objects PC15 and PC16, both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are arranged to overlap each other at the same position in the world coordinate system. However, since the processing of step S2004 is executed, the second connected object PC16 is treated as a completely transparent object at the time of rendering. Therefore, the first connected object of the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 is displayed on the display surface G. Only the PC 15 is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the start specification of the connected object effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether or not the designation of the first effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If it has been set, the processing of step S2004 to step S2009 is executed, and then this setting processing is terminated. In this case, in step S2006, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are grasped from information of parameters set in correspondence with the first connected object PC15 in the drawing list. Update.

  When the setting process for connected object effect is executed as described above, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated. However, since the process of step S2004 is executed, the display surface G is connected to both connected objects. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first linked object PC15 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2005 corresponds to the first connected object PC15, the first connection is performed so that the first operation is performed on the display surface G as the first effect period progresses. Object PC15 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2010 that the designation of the first effect period is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the designation of the second effect period is set in the current drawing list.

  If it is set, in step S2012, a uniform α value setting process for the second effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “0” that is completely transparent information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “1” that is opaque information. To do. As a result, the color information set in advance for all the pixels of the second connected object PC16 (including information on the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is. An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all the pixels of one connected object PC15.

  In the subsequent step S2013, the parameters specified for the second connected object PC16 in the current drawing list are grasped as parameters of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16. Thereafter, in step S2014, a setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  Since this time is a processing time related to the update of the second rendering period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set in correspondence with the second connected object PC16 in the drawing list. It is grasped from the parameter information that is being updated. In this case, the shapes of the two linked objects PC15 and PC16 are substantially the same, but the linked portions of the component objects are different. Then, even if an attempt is made to apply the parameter of the second connected object PC16 to the first connected object PC15 as it is, a pixel whose coordinate designation does not match is generated, but for such a pixel, a predetermined adjustment is performed on the VDP 135 side. .

  In the following step S2015, other objects for the second effect period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and various parameters designated for the object are grasped in step S2016. Thereafter, in step S2017, after setting processing for the object in the world coordinate system is performed, the setting processing for the connected object effect is ended. Here, when the current processing time is a timing related to switching from the first effect period to the second effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, and therefore, in step S2017, a process corresponding thereto is executed. .

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the various parameters of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated. However, since the process of step S2012 is executed, the display surface G is connected to both the connected objects. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the second linked object PC16 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2013 corresponds to the second connected object PC16, the second connection is performed so that the second operation is performed on the display surface G as the second effect period progresses. The object PC 16 is displayed.

  If it is determined in step S2011 that the second rendering period is not specified in the current drawing list, it means that the third rendering period is specified in the current rendering list. The process proceeds to step S2018.

  In step S2018, a uniform α value setting process for the third effect period is executed. Specifically, the uniform α value of the first connected object PC15 is set to “1” that is the opaque information, and the uniform α value of the second connected object PC16 is set to “0” that is the completely transparent information. To do. As a result, the color information set in advance for all the pixels of the first connected object PC15 (including information on the α value set for each pixel from the beginning) is applied as it is. An α value of “0” is uniformly applied to all pixels of the two connected objects PC16.

  In the subsequent step S2019, the parameters specified for the first connected object PC15 in the current drawing list are grasped as the parameters of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16. After that, in step S2020, a setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  Since this time is a processing time related to the update of the third effect period, various parameters of both connected objects PC15 and PC16 set in the world coordinate system are set in correspondence with the first connected object PC15 in the drawing list. It is grasped from the parameter information that is being updated.

  In the subsequent step S2021, other objects for the third effect period specified in the current drawing list are grasped, and in step S2022, various parameters designated for the object are grasped. Thereafter, in step S2023, the setting process for the connected object effect is ended after executing the setting process for the object in the world coordinate system. Here, when the current processing time is a timing related to switching from the second effect period to the third effect period, the number of objects to be displayed increases, and therefore, in step S2023, a process corresponding thereto is executed. .

  By executing the setting process for the connected object effect as described above, the various parameters of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 are updated. However, since the process of step S2018 is executed, the display surface G is connected to both the connected objects. Of the objects PC15 and PC16, only the first linked object PC15 is displayed. In addition, since the parameter updated in step S2019 corresponds to the first connected object PC15, the first connected object performs the first operation on the display surface G as the third effect period progresses. Object PC15 is displayed.

  Next, the contents of the connected object effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the connected object effect. 32A shows the first effect period, FIG. 32B shows the second effect period, and FIG. 32C shows the third effect period. 32 (a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) are image diagrams of the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 32 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2) are The display surface G is shown. Also, in FIG. 32 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2), the background image and the design are omitted, but the background image is actually displayed on the back side of each effect image. And a symbol is displayed on the front side.

  In the first effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but a transparency process is performed on the second connected object PC16. . Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 32 (a-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first action is performed as the first performance period progresses. . Characters CH4 to CH6 indicated by “A” to “C” are displayed as images corresponding to other objects.

  In the second effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (b-1), both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but a transparency process is performed on the first connected object PC15. . Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 32 (b-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the second connected object PC16 is displayed on the display surface G, and the second action is performed as the second effect period progresses. .

  Here, when comparing FIG. 32 (a-2) and FIG. 32 (b-2), both characters CH3 are shown as if they have different shapes. The same texture is mapped to the PC 16, and the connecting portion (joint portion) becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, even if the first effect period is switched to the second effect period, the same, substantially the same or similar image is displayed on the display surface G with respect to the character CH3, and the player is difficult to recognize the change. . However, if it is difficult for the player to recognize the occurrence of switching, textures may be set individually for both connected objects PC15 and PC16.

  In the second effect period, characters CH4 to CH8 indicated by “A” to “E” are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH8 is larger than that in the first effect period.

  In the third effect period, as shown in FIG. 32 (c-1), both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are set in the world coordinate system, but the transparency process is performed on the second connected object PC16. . Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 32 (c-2), the character CH3 corresponding to the first connected object PC15 is displayed on the display surface G, and the first action is performed as the third effect period progresses. . In the third effect period, characters CH4 to CH10 indicated by “A” to “G” are displayed as images corresponding to other objects. The number of characters CH4 to CH10 is larger than that in the second effect period.

  As described above, since a plurality of linked objects PC15 and PC16 are set for a common character, the linked objects PC15 and PC16 to be displayed can be switched according to the type of motion using the joint portion. . For example, if a plurality of types of actions are to be performed with a single connected object, it is necessary to set the corresponding connected parts and component objects for the single connected object. Then, the data capacity of one image data increases, and there is a concern that the memory module 133 may exceed the capacity that can be stored as a single image data. There is a concern that the processing time and transfer time will be prolonged. On the other hand, since it is set as a plurality of connected objects PC15 and PC16, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of actions on the character without causing the above-described disadvantages.

  In addition, there are many occasions where the production is corrected at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, and if the overall movement of the connected object is reviewed every time the movement of the character is corrected, the period required for the design is very long. turn into. On the other hand, by setting a plurality of linked objects PC15 and PC16 according to the type of action to be performed as described above, even if it becomes necessary to correct the production, the linked object PC15 that has already been created. , It is not necessary to modify all of the PC 16. Therefore, it is possible to cause the character to perform a plurality of types of actions while allowing the pachinko machine 10 to be well designed.

  Further, not only the switching source object but also the switching destination object before the timing at which the linked object is switched to display the character is controlled by the display CPU 131 and arranged in the world coordinate system in the VDP 135. Be targeted. As a result, the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 do not execute the control start process for the switching destination object when the switch timing is reached, but execute the control update process with a processing load smaller than the control start process. Therefore, the processing load at the switching timing is reduced.

  In particular, the switching timing is a timing at which the processing load becomes relatively large for the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135 because the production develops and the number of displayed objects increases. In this case, assuming a configuration in which the control start process is performed on the switching destination object, there is a concern that the display CPU 131 or the VDP 135 may lose processing. However, as described above, the control updating process is performed on the switching destination object. Since it only has to be executed, the occurrence of the processing failure can be prevented.

  In addition, since both connected objects PC15 and PC16 are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system and the uniform α value to be applied is switched between completely transparent information and non-transparent information, the display CPU 131 has a uniform α value with respect to switching between both. It is only necessary to specify switching, and the VDP 135 may switch the uniform α value to be applied in accordance with the specification. Therefore, the above excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the complexity of the processing configurations of the display CPU 131 and the VDP 135.

  Further, the display CPU 131 provides the VDP 135 only with parameter information for the connected object to be displayed among the two connected objects PC15 and PC16 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system. This reduces the amount of data set in the drawing list. Further, in the VDP 135, the parameters of both the connected objects PC15 and PC16 may be updated in the same manner, so that the processing load on the VDP 135 can be reduced.

  In the switching from the first effect period to the third effect period, instead of or in addition to the increase in the number of characters, the action of the character for effect different from the character in which the plurality of connected objects are prepared. It may be configured to be newly added, or may be configured to start displaying an effect character with a large processing load separately from the character for which the plurality of connected objects are prepared.

  Further, the control start timing in the display CPU 131 of the second connected object PC16 and the control start timing in the VDP 135 may not be the same as those of the first connected object PC15. For example, although it is before the switching timing from the first effect period to the second effect period, it may be a timing after the control start timing of the first connected object PC15.

  Moreover, although the processing load at the switching timing of the production period is greater than that in the above configuration, the control of the second connected object PC 16 may be started at the switching timing. In this case, since the first connected object PC15 and the second connected object PC16 are not simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, it is not necessary to perform control to switch the display target by adjusting the uniform α value.

  In addition, for both connected objects PC15 and PC16 that are simultaneously arranged in the world coordinate system, the display target may be switched by switching the rendering target instead of by uniformly adjusting the α value. In this case, since the connected object on the side that is not the display target is not rendered, the processing load during rendering is reduced as compared with the above configuration.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which the 3rd production period does not have, and it is good also as a structure by which the production period more than the 4th production period is set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the 3 or more connection object is prepared with respect to one character.

<Configuration for particle dispersion effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a particle dispersion effect will be described.

  The particle dispersion effect is an effect that is displayed as if a large number of particle single images are dispersed over a plurality of continuous frames (a plurality of image update timings). At the time of the dispersion, at least some of the images of the single particle images are displayed so as to be displaced along different trajectories. In the particle dispersion effect, a particle dispersion object having a large number of vertex data set corresponding to a large number of particle single images in a one-to-one correspondence, and a particle dispersion object set corresponding to the particle dispersion object, each vertex A particle dispersion texture having a large number of single image data for displaying a single particle image corresponding to a position corresponding to the data is used.

  The particle dispersion object and the particle dispersion texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b). FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion object PC17, and FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion texture PC18.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, the particle dispersion object PC17 includes vertex data, coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data, and other data other than these. A large number of vertex data is set as vertex (1), vertex (2), vertex (3),..., Vertex (99), vertex (100). Each vertex in the PC 17 is identified. Coordinate data is set in a number of coordinates (1), coordinates (2), coordinates (3),..., Coordinates (99), and coordinates (100) in a one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data. In the VDP 135, the position of each vertex of the particle dispersion object PC17 in the world coordinate system is recognized by these coordinate data.

  The other data includes, for example, initial scale data of the particle dispersion object PC17, initial α value data uniformly applied to all vertex data, and initial rotation angle data of the particle dispersion object PC17. include.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the particle dispersion texture PC 18 includes single data, correlation data corresponding to the single data, single image data corresponding to the single data, and other data other than these. Is included. The single image data is associated with each single data on a one-to-one basis, and single image data (1), single image data (2), single image data (3), ..., single image data (99), single image data A large number of image data (100) are set. Each single image data includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette table referred to when determining a display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Each single image data is data for displaying the same kind of particle single image. Specifically, it is data for displaying “spherical bubbles”, and the shape, the size in the initial state, and the color of the “spherical bubbles” are different in some or all of the individual image data. In this case, even if all the single image data is set at the scale in the initial state in order to increase the number of particle single images to be displayed simultaneously while reducing the processing load in the VDP 135 in executing the particle dispersion effect, On the display surface G, a single particle single image can be displayed simultaneously.

  In addition, the kind of particle | grains may differ about at least one part of each single image data, or all. Moreover, while being the same kind of particle | grains, the shape, the scale in an initial state, and color may be the same.

  The single data of the texture PC 18 for particle dispersion is set as single (1), single (2), single (3),..., Single (99), single (100). A large number of single image data set in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 is individually recognized by the data. Correlation data is set in a large number of vertices (1), vertices (2), vertices (3), ..., vertices (99), vertices (100) in a one-to-one correspondence with each piece of data. The VDP 135 recognizes which single piece of image data in the particle dispersion texture PC 18 corresponds to each of the vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC 17 based on the correlation data.

  The other data includes α value data individually applied to each single image data, α value data uniformly applied to each single image data, and the like.

  Here, initial data is set for each coordinate data in the particle dispersion object PC17, and these initial data have different coordinates. Each coordinate data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritable, and when the particle dispersion object PC17 is set in the world coordinate system, each coordinate data is rewritten to data having a coordinate different from the initial data. Is set in the specified state. A plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set as reference data for rewriting used for such rewriting.

  At least two types of key data KD1 to KD3 are set. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 (c) to (e), the first key data KD1, the second key data KD2, and the third key data. Three types of KD3 are set. Each of these key data KD1 to KD3 includes correlation data and coordinate data corresponding to the correlation data.

  Specifically, the correlation data of the first key data KD1, the correlation data of the second key data KD2, and the correlation data of the third key data KD3 are all the vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 to be applied. These are set in a one-to-one correspondence, and a large number of vertices (1), vertices (2), vertices (3),..., Vertices (99), and vertices (100) are set.

  On the other hand, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1, the coordinate data of the second key data KD2, and the coordinate data of the third key data KD3 are each set in a large number corresponding to each correlation data, There is a difference when comparing between the same correlation data.

  Specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 includes coordinates (1-1), coordinates (2-1), coordinates (3-1), ..., coordinates (99-1), coordinates (100 -1) and the coordinate data of the second key data KD2 are coordinates (1-2), coordinates (2-2), coordinates (3-2), ..., coordinates (99-2). ), Coordinates (100-2), and the coordinate data of the third key data KD3 includes coordinates (1-3), coordinates (2-3), coordinates (3-3),. A large number of coordinates (99-3) and coordinates (100-3) are set. Also, the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (1) is the coordinate (1-1) for the first key data KD1, the coordinate (1-2) for the second key data KD2, and the coordinate (1-2) for the third key data KD3. 1-3) and the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex (100) are the coordinates (100-1) for the first key data KD1, the coordinates (100-2) for the second key data KD2, and the third key. In the data KD3, different coordinate data are set for one vertex data such as the coordinate (100-3).

  Incidentally, each of the key data KD1 to KD3 is set to have a data capacity smaller than that of the particle dispersion object PC17 in relation to the fact that the α value data and the rotation angle data are not set.

  Each of the key data KD1 to KD3 is set to determine the displacement trajectory of each particle single image as described above, and the order of application to the particle dispersion object PC17 is determined in advance. Specifically, the second key data KD2 is used when setting the coordinate data ahead of the displacement direction of each particle single image from the first key data KD1, and the third key data KD3 is the second key data. This is used when setting the coordinate data of the displacement direction ahead of each particle single image from KD2. When the particle dispersion object PC17 is set in the world coordinate system, the coordinate data of the key data KD1 to KD3 is applied to each vertex data, so that each particle single image corresponding to each vertex data is obtained. Displacement in the orbit.

  In this case, at least for a predetermined number of frames, a plurality of key data KD1 to KD3, more specifically, coordinate data of two key data KD1 to KD3 is applied to each vertex data in a fused state. . Specifically, the first key data KD1 for determining the coordinate data of each vertex data in the first frame (that is, the image update timing) of the particle dispersion effect is the first frame number that is a plurality of frames after the first frame. It is used over the first frame period corresponding to (for example, 99 frames). The second key data KD2 includes the first frame period, the first frame to be switched corresponding to the next frame with respect to the first frame period, and the second frame number corresponding to the second frame number that is a plurality of frames thereafter. Used over two frame periods. The third key data KD3 is used over the second frame period. In this case, the first frame number and the second frame number are the same.

  Note that the fourth key data may be set after the third key data KD3. In this case, the third key data KD3 is stored in the second frame period in the next frame period. Used for the third frame period corresponding to the second frame to be switched corresponding to the third frame number (the same number of frames as the first frame number and the second frame number) which is a plurality of frames thereafter. The fourth key data is used over the third frame period.

  With this configuration, the number of the key data KD1 to KD3 is smaller than the number of continuous frames when the particle dispersion effect is executed, more specifically, in the particle dispersion object PC17 during the particle dispersion effect. Even when the coordinate data of each vertex data is set to a number smaller than the number of changes, it is possible to smoothly display a state in which each particle single image is displaced.

  A specific processing configuration for executing a particle dispersion effect using the particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and the key data KD1 to KD3 will be described below. The particle dispersion object PC17, the particle dispersion texture PC18, and the key data KD1 to KD3 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

  FIG. 34 (a) is a flowchart showing a calculation process for particle dispersion effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the particle dispersion effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). The particle dispersion effect calculation process is activated when a data table corresponding to the game times in which the particle dispersion effect is executed is set.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether the particle dispersion effect is being executed based on the currently set data table. If the effect is not being executed, it is determined in step S2102 whether it is the start timing of the particle dispersion effect. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2103.

  In step S2103, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a control object based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2103, the control start process for the particle dispersion object PC17 is completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). The control information of the particle dispersion object PC 17 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the particle dispersion effect is completed.

  In the subsequent step S2104, initial read processing for reading the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 from the memory module 133 is executed, and in step S2105, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17. Then, the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17 is updated. Then, after storing the start designation information of the particle dispersion effect in step S2106, the calculation process is terminated.

  When the computation processing for particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the use instruction information of the particle dispersion object PC17 is included in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing. The first key data KD1 and second key data KD2 set together with the usage instruction information and read in step S2104 and the parameters calculated in step S2105 are set. Also, start designation information for the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be started is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2101 that the particle dispersion effect is being performed, it is determined in step S2107 whether it is the update timing of the key data based on the currently set data table. Such update timing corresponds to the above-described first switching target frame.

  If it is not time to update the key data (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to step S2108. In step S2108, the particle dispersion object PC17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In the subsequent step S2109, processing for determining the blend ratio of the key data is executed. In the process of determining the blend ratio, the currently set two pieces of key data KD1 to KD3 are referred to by referring to a blend table BT as shown in FIG. 34 (b) stored in advance in the memory module 133. The blend ratio data for blending the coordinate data is read out, and the coordinate data is blended with the read data.

  The blend table BT is described in detail. In the blend table BT, data on the number of frames is set, and the key data on the front side is set in correspondence with the data on the number of frames. The ratio to be applied to each coordinate data and the ratio to be applied to each coordinate data set in the rear key data are set. In this case, the blending table BT is set so that the blending ratio is changed at a constant ratio every time the number of frames increases by 1, that is, whenever the coordinate update timing of each particle single image comes. Specifically, for the front key data, the ratio for blending by 1% decreases at each update timing, and for the rear key data, 1% at each update timing. The blending table BT is set so that the ratio at the time of blending increases and the sum of the ratio of the front key data and the ratio of the rear key data becomes 100% at each update timing.

  The blend table BT is not limited to a configuration in which the ratio is set to change by 1% at each update timing, but 2% or 2% or the like. % May be set to change by% or more, or may be set to change at a different ratio instead of a fixed ratio.

  In step S2109, the blend table BT is referred to based on the currently set data table. In step S2109, based on the current pointer information set in the data table, the number of frames to be referred to in the blend table BT is grasped, and the key data of the front key set in the number of frames is determined. The ratio and the ratio of the key data on the rear side are read out. In this case, if the currently set data table is the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the first key data KD1 corresponds to the front key data, and the second key data KD2 corresponds to the rear key data. Corresponds to data.

  Thereafter, in step S2110, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17, and the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17 is updated. In step S2111, the particle dispersion effect is displayed. After storing the update designation information, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the computation processing for particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the use instruction information of the particle dispersion object PC17 is included in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing. The blend ratio data set in step S2109 and the parameter calculated in step S2110 are set together with use instruction information. In addition, update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2107 that the key data update timing is reached, the process advances to step S2112. In step S2112, the particle dispersion object PC 17 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In a succeeding step S2113, a process for reading new key data is executed. In such processing, the next key data KD1 to KD3 are read from the memory module 133 for the rear key data of the two currently set key data. Specifically, since the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 are currently set, the rear key data among them is the second key data KD2, and the key data in the next order is It becomes the third key data KD3.

  Thereafter, in step S2114, various parameters other than the coordinates are calculated for the particle dispersion object PC17, and the control information related to the particle dispersion object PC17 is updated. In step S2115, the particle dispersion effect is displayed. After storing the update designation information, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the computation processing for particle dispersion effect is executed as described above, the use instruction information of the particle dispersion object PC17 is included in the drawing list created by the subsequent drawing list output processing. The third key data KD3 set together with the usage instruction information and read in step S2112 and the parameter calculated in step S2113 are set. In addition, update designation information of the particle dispersion effect indicating that the particle dispersion effect should be updated is set in the drawing list.

  Incidentally, from the next processing time when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2107 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect is reached, and the processing in steps S2108 to S2111 is executed. In this case, in step S2109, the blend ratio is sequentially determined using the second key data KD2 as the front key data and the second key data KD2 as the rear key data.

  Next, the setting process for particle dispersion effect executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the particle dispersion effect is executed in the effect setting process in step S1003 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). The setting process for the particle dispersion effect is activated when either the start specification information of the particle dispersion effect or the update specification information of the particle dispersion effect is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not start designation information for particle dispersion effect is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, in step S2202, the address where the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped based on the current drawing list, and the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored in the VRAM 134. Read to the development buffer 141. Thereafter, in step S2203, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153.

  In a succeeding step S2204, an initial application process is executed. In the initial application process, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1, thereby setting the start coordinates of each vertex data. In step S2205, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

  Thereafter, in step S2206, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed for the particle dispersion object PC17, and then this setting process is terminated. Thereby, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at coordinates corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is set for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. Is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the start specification of the particle dispersion effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether new key data is specified in the current drawing list.

  If not specified, coordinate blending processing is executed in step S2008. In the blending process, the currently set two pieces of key data, specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 are set in the current drawing list in the first frame period. Blend according to the blend ratio data.

In this case, first, the coordinate data corresponding to one vertex data of the first key data KD1 is read, and the coordinate data corresponding to the vertex data of the second key data KD2 is read. Then, the former coordinate data is (x1, y1, z1), the latter coordinate data is (x2, y2, z2), the ratio of the front side key data read from the blending table BT is rt1, and the blending table BT When the ratio of the read back key data is rt2, the coordinate data (x, y, z) after blending is
x: x1 * rt1 + x2 * rt2
y: y1 * rt1 + y2 * rt2
z: z1 * rt1 + z2 * rt2
Blend so that Further, such blending is executed for coordinate data corresponding to all vertex data.

  In the subsequent step S2209, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17. Thereafter, in step S2210, each coordinate data that is the blend result in step S2208 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 that is already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameter grasped in step S2209 is set to the relevant particle. After setting for the distribution object PC 17, this setting process is terminated.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data as the blend result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data as the blend result in step S2208. Thereby, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the blend result of step S2208. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is set for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. Is set.

  If it is determined in step S2207 that new key data is specified in the current drawing list, key data update processing is executed in step S2211. In the update process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the front key data, specifically, the first key data KD1 is replaced with new key data set in the current drawing list. Specifically, it is rewritten to the third key data KD3.

  In the subsequent step S2212, application processing at the time of update is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2213, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

  Thereafter, in step S2214, each coordinate data grasped in step S2212 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameter grasped in step S2214 is set for the particle dispersion. After setting for the object PC 17, this setting process is terminated.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data grasped in step S2212, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data grasped in step S2212. Thereby, each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set at the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the single particle image data corresponding to each vertex data is set for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. Is set.

  Incidentally, from the next processing time when the third key data KD3 is newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2207 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect is reached, and the processing in steps S2208 to S2210 is executed. In this case, in step S2208, coordinate blending is executed using the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3.

  Next, the content of the particle dispersion effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the particle dispersion effect, and FIGS. 36 (b-1) and (b-2) simply show how the individual particle images are displaced. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the particle dispersion effect is executed as an effect for game times, and specifically, when the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on one active line when the game times are ended. In addition, the particle dispersion effect is executed. In the particle dispersion effect, a large number of single particle images PT that are “spherical bubbles” are displayed on the display surface G, and the large number of single particle images PT are displaced in a predetermined trajectory over a plurality of consecutive frames. Is displayed.

  The predetermined trajectory will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 36 (b-1) and (b-2). In a state where each coordinate data of the first key data KD1 is set, the particle single image PT1, Each of the particle single image PT2 and the particle single image PT3 is displayed at a position corresponding to the start coordinate indicated by the solid line in FIG. In this case, the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

  In the subsequent first frame period, the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed, and as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 are displayed as if they are displaced along different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by the blend process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear.

  When the first frame period has elapsed, the coordinate data of the second key data KD2 is set, so that each of the particle single image PT1, the particle single image PT2, and the particle single image PT3 is shown in FIG. In 2), it is displayed at a position corresponding to the switching target coordinates indicated by a solid line. In this case, the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are displayed at different positions.

  In the subsequent second frame period, by executing blend processing of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 36 (b-2), the particle single image PT1, The single particle image PT2 and the single particle image PT3 are displayed as if they are displaced along different trajectories. In this case, since the coordinates are determined by the blend process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2, the displacement trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 are linear. In addition, the trajectories of the individual particle images PT1 to PT3 in the second frame period are different from the trajectories in the first frame period.

  As described above, in the particle dispersion effect, the coordinate data of each vertex data in the particle dispersion object PC17 is set using a blend of a plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3, thereby reducing the data capacity and It is possible to provide a display effect as if a large number of single particle images are dispersed while achieving a balance between the reduction of processing load.

  That is, a configuration in which the animation data in which the coordinate data of the single image data is set over the total number of frames is set so as to correspond to the single image data on a one-to-one basis is also conceivable. Become. On the other hand, by using a blend of a plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, the required data capacity can be reduced compared to the configuration in which all animation data is set as described above. It becomes possible.

  On the other hand, a configuration is also conceivable in which the coordinate data of all single image data is calculated only by processing based on the program. However, in this case, if each particle single image is displayed in a different orbit, it is complicated. A huge program is required. On the other hand, by using a blend of a plurality of types of key data KD1 to KD3 as described above, information for calculating coordinate data is appropriately distributed between the program side and the data side. The load can be reduced.

  Further, since the single image data is not set as an individual object but is set in correspondence with each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC 17, the data capacity of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 is reduced. It becomes possible.

  Also, when reading an object for setting single image data in the VDP 135, it is possible to read the particle dispersion object PC17 instead of reading each individual object corresponding to each single image data. The processing load required for the reading can be reduced.

  Further, since the blending process of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 is executed by the VDP 135 instead of the display CPU 131, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

<Another form of setting process for particle dispersion effect>
FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the setting process for particle dispersion effect executed in the VDP 135.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not start designation information for particle dispersion effects is set in the current drawing list. If set, in step S2302, based on the current drawing list, the memory module 133 grasps the address where the particle dispersion object PC17 is stored, and reads the particle dispersion object PC17. Thereafter, in step S2303, the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 set in the current drawing list are stored in the register 153.

  In the subsequent step S2304, the memory module 133 grasps addresses where the first texture and the second texture are stored based on the current drawing list.

  Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of textures are set corresponding to each key data KD1 to KD3 on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, the first texture, the second texture, and the third texture are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the first key data KD1, the second key data KD2, and the third key data KD3. In a configuration in which four or more types of key data are set, it is only necessary that four or more types of textures are set correspondingly.

  For each texture, single image data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each vertex data, similarly to the particle dispersion texture PC 18 shown in FIG. As described above, since a plurality of types of textures are set for a single particle dispersion object PC17, the type of single image data set for one vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is a plurality of frames. (Ie, a plurality of update timings), and the change is performed on a large number of vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17, more specifically on all vertex data.

  For example, in the first texture, the single image data for the first vertex data is the first single image data for displaying the first single image (for example, “◯” shown in FIG. 36). In 2 textures, single image data for the first vertex data is second single image data for displaying a second single image (for example, “□” shown in FIG. 36). Similarly, in the first texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is the third single image data for displaying the third single image (for example, “Δ” shown in FIG. 36). In the second texture, the single image data for the second vertex data is single image data for displaying a single image (for example, “◯” shown in FIG. 36) different from the third single image.

  After executing the process of step S2304, the initial application process is executed in step S2305, as in step S2204. Thereby, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is set to a start coordinate corresponding to each coordinate data set in the first key data KD1.

  Thereafter, in step S2306, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2307. For the particle dispersion object PC17, after performing the setting process to the world coordinate system, this setting process is terminated. Also, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the first texture and the second texture among the first texture and the second texture are set for each vertex data set as described above. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the first texture is displayed at the coordinates corresponding to the first key data KD1.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the start specification of the particle dispersion effect is not set in the current drawing list, the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether new key data is specified in the current drawing list.

  If not specified, in step S2309, the numerical value information of the blending counter provided in the register 153 is updated so that 1 is added. Here, the blending counter is specified by the VDP 135 when blending coordinate data using a plurality of key data and when blending single image data using a plurality of textures. It is a counter for doing.

  The blending counter is set to “0” as an initial value. When the counter value is “1”, the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 99% and the rear side The ratio of the key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 1%, the ratio of the front texture (for example, the first texture) is 99%, and the ratio of the rear texture (for example, the second texture) is 1. %. When the counter value is “2”, the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is 98% and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is 2. %, And the ratio of the texture on the front side (for example, the first texture) is 98% and the ratio of the texture on the rear side (for example, the second texture) is 2%. When the counter value is “99”, the ratio of the front key data (for example, the first key data KD1) is set to 1% and the ratio of the rear key data (for example, the second key data KD2) is set to 99. %, And the ratio of the front texture (for example, the first texture) is 1% and the ratio of the rear texture (for example, the second texture) is 99%. In other words, as the number of frames progresses, the application ratio of the front key data is reduced, while the application ratio of the rear key data is increased, and similarly, the application ratio of the front texture is reduced. The application ratio of the side texture is increased.

  The blend ratio information corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter as described above is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as table information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the numerical information of the blending counter is not limited thereto. It is good also as a structure which calculates the information of the blend ratio corresponding to 1 by the arithmetic expression defined by the program.

  In the subsequent step S2310, coordinate blending processing is executed. In the blending process, the two key data currently set, specifically, the coordinate data of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 in the first frame period, the update process in step S2309. The blending is performed according to the blending ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the later blending counter. A specific calculation method of this blend is the same as that in step S2208.

  In the subsequent step S2311, a texture blending process is executed. In the blending process, the two textures that are currently grasped, specifically, the single image data of the first texture and the second texture in the first frame period are used for blending after the update process in step S2309. Blend according to the blend ratio corresponding to the numerical information of the counter.

For example, first, single image data corresponding to one vertex data of the first texture is read, and single image data corresponding to the vertex data of the second texture is read. Then, each color information of RGB in the former single image data (here, for convenience of description, 1 pixel) is (r1, g1, b1), and the latter single image data (here, for convenience of description, 1 pixel). (R2, g2, b2), the ratio of the front texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt3, and the ratio of the rear texture corresponding to the numerical information of the blending counter is rt4 (rt3 + rt4 = 1). In this case, the single image data (r, g, b) after blending is
r: r1 × rt3 + r2 × rt4
g: g1 * rt3 + g2 * rt4
b: b1 × rt3 + b2 × rt4
Blend so that Further, such blending is executed for single image data corresponding to all vertex data.

  Thereafter, in step S2312, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17, and in step S2313, For the particle dispersion object PC17, after performing the setting process to the world coordinate system, this setting process is terminated.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data as the blend result, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data as the blend result in step S2310. In the color information setting process (step S1009) of the rendering process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, each piece of single image data that is the blend result in step S2311 is applied to each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. Applied. As a result, the single image corresponding to the blend result of step S2311 is displayed with the coordinates corresponding to the blend result of step S2310.

  Here, since the blend ratio is derived using the blend counter on the VDP 135 side as described above, the display CPU 131 does not execute the process for deriving the blend ratio. Thereby, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

  Note that the display CPU 131 uses these key keys when a combination of predetermined key data such as a combination of the first key data KD1 and the second key data KD2 or a combination of the second key data KD2 and the third key data KD3 is used. The VDP 135 may be instructed the number of times of changing the data blend ratio, and the VDP 135 may uniquely determine the blend ratio at each change time for the predetermined combination of key data in accordance with the instruction. In this case, when there are multiple types of periods in which the same combination of key data is used, if the processing load of the VDP 135 is greater in a specific period than in other periods, By reducing the number of changes instructed by the display CPU 131, the processing load on the VDP 135 can be reduced. Further, in the above configuration, the VDP 135 may be configured such that the blend ratio is changed at a constant rate at each change time. In this case, each VDP 135 is uniquely set according to the instructed change count. Data that can derive the blend ratio of the changed times may be set, or the blend ratio of each changed time may be derived by calculation.

  If it is determined in step S2308 that new key data is specified in the current drawing list, the blending counter is initialized in step S2314. Thereby, the calculation of the blend ratio is started from the beginning from the next processing time.

  In a succeeding step S2315, a key data update process is executed. In the update process, of the two key data currently stored in the register 153, the front key data, specifically, the first key data KD1 is replaced with new key data set in the current drawing list. Specifically, it is rewritten to the third key data KD3. In step S2316, a new texture is grasped. In this process, of the two textures currently stored in the register 153, the front texture, specifically the first texture, is set to the new texture set in the current drawing list, specifically the first texture. Rewrite to 3 textures. In this rewriting, the third texture is read from the memory module 133.

  In the subsequent step S2317, an application process at the time of update is executed. Specifically, each coordinate data set in the second key data KD2 is grasped. In step S2318, parameters other than the coordinates specified for the particle dispersion object PC17 in the current drawing list are grasped as other parameters of the particle dispersion object PC17.

  Thereafter, in step S2319, the coordinate data obtained in step S2317 is set for the particle dispersion object PC17 already set in the world coordinate system, and the parameters obtained in step S2318 are set for the particle dispersion object. After setting for the object PC 17, this setting process is terminated.

  In this case, when setting each coordinate data, each coordinate data corresponding to each vertex data of the particle dispersion object PC17 is rewritten to each coordinate data grasped in step S2317. Further, in the color information setting process (step S1009) of the drawing process (FIG. 16) in the VDP 135, the second texture among the second texture and the third texture is set for each vertex data set to the coordinates as described above. Only applies to the particle dispersion object PC17. As a result, the single image corresponding to the second texture is displayed with the coordinates corresponding to the second key data KD2.

  Incidentally, from the next processing time when the third key data KD3 and the third texture are newly set, a negative determination is made in step S2308 until the end timing of the particle dispersion effect, and the processing in steps S2309 to S2313 is performed. Execute. In this case, in step S2310, coordinate blending is executed using the second key data KD2 and third key data KD3, and in step S2311, single image data blending is executed using the second texture and the third texture. The

  In another form for executing the particle dispersion effect as described above, the display mode of the particle dispersion effect is changed by the difference in the texture applied to the same object as the effect progresses. And the monotonization of the display effect is suppressed. In this case, a different texture is not used for each frame whose display mode is changed, but a texture corresponding to the first update timing and a second update timing after a plurality of update timings are supported. By blending with the texture, the image data used between the first update timing and the second update timing is created, so the number of textures stored in advance can be reduced. Thus, the data capacity can be reduced.

  Each texture is set to correspond to each key data on a one-to-one basis, and each texture is switched in accordance with the switching of each key data. Therefore, the processing load of processing related to switching in the VDP 135 can be reduced.

<Other forms of particle dispersion effect>
In the particle dispersion effect (in the case of FIG. 35 and FIG. 37), the number of key data KD1 to KD3 is set to be larger and the number of frames until the key data KD1 to KD3 to be used is changed is set to be smaller. By doing so (for example, every 10 frames), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the single image is displaced and displayed so as to draw a curved trajectory instead of a straight line while performing blending of coordinate data.

  The object to be blended using the key data KD1 to KD3 may be an α value for setting the transparency in addition to or instead of the coordinate data, and the color information of the vertex data without executing texture mapping It is good also as a vertex color which makes it possible to determine the color information of the polygon which consists of several vertex data. Further, in the configuration in which the UV scroll for changing the display mode even when the same texture is pasted by changing the UV value for determining the relative pasting position of the texture with respect to the object, the UV is used. It is good also as a structure which changes a value using the blend of key data.

  The first frame period and the second frame period are not limited to the same number of frames, and the number of frames included in these frame periods may be different. In this case, it is necessary to perform a blending process according to each frame period.

  -It is good also as a structure with the same kind of single image data for displaying a single image. In this case, since it is not necessary to set single image data corresponding to each piece of single data in the particle dispersion texture PC 18, the data capacity of the particle dispersion texture PC 18 can be reduced.

  -It is good also as a structure which blends using 3 or more types of key data instead of the structure which blends using 2 types of key data. In this case, by appropriately changing the blending ratio of these three types of key data, it is possible to make the trajectory when the single image is displaced not a straight line but a curved line. When blending using three or more types of key data, for example, a virtual arc or sphere is assumed by calculation from these three or more types of key data, and displacement is performed along the assumed virtual arc or sphere. Alternatively, a single image may be displayed so as to progress.

  The VDP 135 may have a dedicated circuit that calculates vertex data using key data. The VDP 135 may have a dedicated circuit for calculating vertex data when key data is not used. By adopting a configuration having these circuits individually, it is possible to specialize calculation of each vertex data, and it is possible to suitably calculate vertex data.

  The configuration in which parameter data is derived using key data as described above may be applied to a configuration in which image display is performed using image data of two-dimensional information such as sprite data. For example, in order to derive a coordinate parameter when sprite data is set in the frame buffer 142, a plurality of key data may be blended.

<Configuration for sea level display>
Next, a configuration for performing sea level display will be described.

  The sea level display is an effect for displaying the sea level in the background, and is an effect that is displayed so as to wave over a plurality of frames (a plurality of image update timings) where the sea level continues. The sea level display is a display effect executed in the first display mode among the first display mode and the second display mode described above. When displaying the sea surface, a sea surface object and normal map data for finely changing the motion of the sea surface object are used.

  These sea surface objects and normal map data will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 (a) and (b). FIG. 38A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface object PC19, and FIG. 38B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal map data ND1 and ND2.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the sea surface object PC19 has a large number of surface data (polygons) SD defined by a plurality of vertex data so as to form a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns. In this case, each surface data SD has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38A, the surface data SD of the lower left corner portion has information of the first column and the first row as the order information, and in FIG. 38A, the surface data SD of the upper right corner portion is the 25th column. It has 25 rows of information as order information.

  Each surface data SD is defined as a quadrangle by four vertex data, but is not limited to this, and may be defined as a triangle by three vertex data. It may be defined as another polygon. One arbitrary surface data SD is adjacent to the other surface data SD, and the vertex data of the one surface data SD also serves as the vertex data of the other surface data SD. That is, each surface data SD has a common side between the adjacent surface data SD. Therefore, basically, when the coordinate data of one vertex data is changed, a plurality of surface data SD is deformed, and the coordinate data of one side composed of two adjacent vertex data is changed. In this case, the direction of the plurality of surface data SD is changed.

  In the sea surface object PC19, initial coordinate data of each vertex data is set in order to determine the coordinates and the orientation of the surface of each surface data SD in the initial state. In addition, the initial scale data of the sea surface object PC19, the initial α value data uniformly applied to all vertex data (or surface data SD), and the initial rotation angle of the sea surface object PC19. Data is included.

  Here, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is divided into a plurality of groups by grouping a plurality of adjacent surface data SD. Specifically, the first surface data group,. It has a data group (k is an integer of 2 or more, and k = 25 in the present embodiment). The number of surface data SD included in each surface data group is the same for a plurality of predetermined numbers (specifically, 25), but the surface data SD included in at least some of the surface data groups. The number may be different. In FIG. 38A, each unit surrounded by a thick line corresponds to a surface data group.

  In each of the surface data groups, the coordinates and the orientation of the surface are individually determined based on the control in the display CPU 131. Specifically, the entire surface data SD included in the first surface data group constitutes the same surface facing a predetermined direction, and in this state, the coordinates of the surface data SD serving as a reference in the first surface data group are the predetermined coordinates. The coordinates of the surface data SD and the surface direction included in the first surface data group are determined so that That is, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are roughly determined in units of sea surface data groups. Hereinafter, the coordinates and orientation determined in units of each surface data group are also referred to as a first stage form.

  The reference plane data SD is a single plane data SD in each plane data group, but may be a plurality of plane data SD. Further, instead of setting the coordinates based on the surface data SD, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which coordinates serving as a reference are set for the vertex data constituting the corner portion of the surface data group. The reference coordinates may be set for all, or the reference coordinates may be set only for one corner portion. Further, in order to make the sea surface object PC 19 a series, in the adjacent surface data group, the coordinates and the orientation of the surface are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary portion between them are the same.

  The normal map data ND1 and ND2 are data for making the directions of the surface data SD included in each surface data group different from each other after the first stage form is determined in units of each surface data group. Yes, a plurality of types, specifically, two types of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 has a large number of unit normal data UND for changing the direction of each surface data SD from the first stage form. In the following description, one of the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 is also referred to as first normal map data ND1, and the other is also referred to as second normal map data ND2.

  FIG. 38B is an image diagram of normal map data ND1 and ND2 having a large number of unit normal data UND, and each square portion arranged in a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns is a unit method. Line data UND is shown. In this case, in each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2, each unit normal data UND has a combination of row information and column information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as order information). For example, in FIG. 38B, the unit normal data UND in the lower left corner portion has information of the first column and the first row as the order information, and in FIG. 38B, the unit normal data UND in the upper right corner portion is The information in the 35th column and the 35th row is included as the order information.

  Each unit normal data UND includes direction data when the direction of each surface data SD is changed from the first stage form, and change amount data when the direction is changed in the direction (hereinafter also referred to as change data). doing. In this case, in one normal map data ND1 and ND2, the data of the direction to be changed and the data of the amount of change in the direction are the same among some unit normal data UND. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be different among all unit normal data UND.

  Between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, the same change data determined by each unit normal data UND is included, but the arrangement of the change data does not match. In this case, in all the order information between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, the change data determined by each unit normal data UND may be different. The change data determined by the line data UND may be different. In each of the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the number of unit normal data UND is the same but may be different.

  The number of unit normal data UND in each normal map data ND1, ND2 is set to be larger than the number of surface data SD constituting the sea surface object PC19. In such a configuration, when the unit normal data UND of each normal map data ND1, ND2 is applied to the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19, the entire surface data SD is within the range included in each normal map data ND1, ND2. The unit normal data UND to be applied to the reference surface data SD is selected, the relationship is used as a reference, and the order information on the surface data SD side and the order information on the unit normal data UND side are used, thereby Unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD other than the reference surface data SD is selected.

  More specifically, in the configuration having the surface data SD for the m-th column and the n-th row (m and n are integers of 1 or more), the reference surface data SD is the first column and the first row, When the corresponding unit normal data UND is the s-th column and the t-th row (s and t are integers of 1 or more), the unit normal data UND used this time is the s-th column to the (s + m-1) -th column. Thus, the length is from the t-th column to the (t + n-1) -th row. Therefore, the unit normal data UND is read from the normal map data ND1 and ND2. The read unit normal data UND is converted into order information by an operation in which the order information of the s-th column and the t-th row becomes the first column and the first row, and the converted order information Are associated with the surface data SD of the same order information.

  A method of applying the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 to the sea surface object PC19 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 39A, when the direction of the surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 is changed using the normal map data ND1 and ND2, the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 is the sea surface object. The same applies to the PC 19 at the same time. In this case, at the start of the sea surface display, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of one normal map data ND1 coincides with the corner portion on the same side of the sea surface object PC19, and the sea surface object PC19 Data setting is performed so that all the plane data SD correspond to different unit normal data UND. Similarly, for the other normal map data ND2, the unit normal data UND of the corner portion of the normal map data ND2 matches the corner portion on the same side of the sea surface object PC19, and the sea surface object Data setting is performed so that all the plane data SD of the PC 19 correspond to different unit normal data UND.

  In this case, the unit normal data UND of one normal map data ND1 and the unit normal data UND of the other normal map data ND2 simultaneously correspond to the same surface data SD. When the change data of these unit normal data UND is applied to the surface data SD, the direction of the surface data SD by the change data corresponding to one normal map data ND1 and the other normal map data ND2 Each change data is blended so as to be in the middle of the direction of the surface data SD based on the change data, and the change data resulting from the blending is applied to the surface data SD.

  In FIG. 39A, the position of the corner portion serving as a reference at the start is different between one normal map data ND1 and the other normal map data ND2, but is the same. Also good. Even in this case, since the arrangement of the change data is different between the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2, the contents of the change data applied to the plane data SD are the same in both normal map data ND1 and ND2. Will not occur for all surface data SD.

  Thereafter, as the number of frames in the sea surface display proceeds, as shown in FIG. 39B, unit normal data UND corresponding to the surface data SD serving as the reference of the sea surface object PC19 is It is changed in each of the normal map data ND1, ND2. However, in this change, the change is performed so that all the plane data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 correspond to different unit normal data UND.

  Thus, by changing the unit normal data UND corresponding to the reference surface data SD, it is possible to gradually change the direction in which the direction of each surface data SD is changed, and the sea surface display is rich in changes. It becomes possible to be. Further, since the pair of normal map data ND1 and ND2 are blended, even if the variation of the change data is suppressed to some extent in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, it is substantially applied to the plane data SD. It is possible to increase the variation of change data.

  Next, a method of applying change data to each surface data SD will be described with reference to FIG.

  As already described, the unit normal data UND is individually associated with each surface data SD, but the change data by the unit normal data UND is not applied to all the surface data SD. The change data based on the unit normal data UND is applied only to a part of the surface data SD1 in each surface data group. Specifically, the surface data SD1 to be applied is determined in advance so that the change data is not applied to the surface data SD sharing the same vertex data at the same time.

  Specifically, the surface data SD1 to which the change data is applied in each surface data group is limited to a part as shown in FIG. 40 (a), and there is other data between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Since the surface data SD2 exists, the vertex data is not shared between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Further, since the surface data SD1 to be applied does not constitute a corner portion in the surface data group, even when viewed between the surface data groups, the vertex data is shared between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Not. With such a configuration, even if the orientation of the surface data SD is randomly changed using the normal map data ND1, ND2, the surface data SD1 is between the surface data SD1 to be applied. Therefore, there is buffer surface data SD2 for absorbing the difference in the orientation of the sea surface, and it is possible to ensure continuity as the surface of the sea surface object PC19.

  FIGS. 40B-1 and 40B-2 show how the orientation of each surface data SD is changed from the first stage by applying the change data to the surface data SD1 to be applied. Show. As shown in FIG. 40 (b-1), in the first stage form, the surface data SD1 and SD2 included in the predetermined surface data group face the same direction and form the same surface. Yes.

  Of these plane data SD1 and SD2, the second and fourth plane data are the target plane data SD1, and the second and fourth plane data SD1 are obtained by blending both normal map data ND1 and ND2. Some change data is applied. At this time, as shown in FIG. 40 (b-2), the second and fourth surface data SD1 are changed to directions based on the corresponding change data. Further, the first, third, and fifth surface data SD2, which are the buffer surface data SD2 instead of the surface data SD1 to be applied, are the sea surface objects in a mode in which the amount of change from the first stage form is the smallest. The direction is changed so as to ensure continuity as the surface of the PC 19.

  A specific processing configuration for setting the direction of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 will be described below.

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing a calculation process for sea level display executed by the display CPU 131. The sea level display calculation process is executed in the background calculation process in step S903 of the task process (FIG. 14). Further, the calculation process for sea level display is executed in the state of the first display mode, and is executed as a part of the processes in steps S1502 to S1505 in FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined based on the currently set data table whether the sea level display is being executed. If the sea level display is not being executed, it is determined in step S2402 whether it is the start timing of the sea level display. If it is not the start timing, the calculation process is terminated as it is, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S2403.

  In step S2403, based on the currently set data table, the sea surface object PC19 is grasped as a control target. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2403, the control start process for the sea surface object PC19 is completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). The control information of the sea surface object PC 19 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the display of the sea surface is completed.

  In subsequent step S2404, information for instructing the VDP 135 to control the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is stored. However, the display CPU 131 does not execute a calculation process necessary for actually applying the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 to the sea surface object PC19. That is, the display CPU 131 instructs the VDP 135 to use the data ND1 and ND2 for the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2, but actually uses the data ND1 and ND2. The calculation process for controlling the operation is not executed. Thereby, the processing load on the display CPU 131 can be reduced.

  In the subsequent step S2405, the sea surface animation data is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea surface animation data AD. The sea surface animation data AD is data for controlling the sea surface object PC 19 in units of surface data groups, and the sea surface animation data AD determines the reference coordinates and orientation of each surface data group. The first stage form is determined for the object PC19.

  More specifically, a plurality of pointer information are set in the sea surface animation data AD so as to be serial numbers, and each pointer information includes reference coordinate data and orientation information for each surface data group. Data is set. For example, for the first surface data group, reference coordinate data (A1-1) and orientation data (B1-1) are set corresponding to the first pointer information, and the second pointer is set. Corresponding to the information, reference coordinate data (A1-2) and orientation data (B1-2) are set, and the f-th pointer information (f is an integer of 3 or more, for example, “50”). The reference coordinate data (A1-f) and the orientation data (B1-f) are set corresponding to the above. Also, reference coordinate data and orientation data are set for the second surface data group,..., K-th surface data group in association with each pointer information.

  The pointer information is updated when one frame proceeds in a state where the sea surface display is performed (every time the image update timing is reached), and the combination of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data is the next along with the update of the pointer information. It will be changed to the thing of the order. In this case, the continuous reference coordinate data and orientation data are set such that the first stage form has motion continuity in each surface data group.

  In addition, the arrangement mode of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data according to the progress of the pointer information is different between the surface data groups, but the continuity in form is not impaired between the adjacent surface data groups. These reference coordinate data and orientation data are set. In other words, a surface data group in which a plurality of sides are in contact with another surface data group is released from the state in contact with the other surface data group if the reference coordinates and orientation of the other surface data group are determined. Unless this is done, restrictions are imposed on the reference coordinates and orientation, and in some cases, the coordinates are uniquely determined. In such a situation, the reference coordinates and orientation of each surface data group are determined in advance so as not to cancel the state in contact with the other surface data group. Specifically, as already described, in the adjacent surface data group, the reference coordinate data and the orientation data are determined so that the coordinates of the vertex data at the boundary portion between them are the same.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 41A, after the sea surface animation data AD is read out in step S2405, initial setting data is grasped from the sea surface animation data AD in step S2406. Specifically, a combination of reference coordinate data and orientation data set in correspondence with the first pointer information is read out for the entire data group as start data. Thereafter, after storing the sea surface display start designation information in step S2407, the present calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for sea level display is executed as described above, information on the instruction to use the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the first method is used. Information on instruction to use the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. Furthermore, initial setting data for the first-stage form grasped in step S2406 is set, and sea surface display start designation information indicating that the sea surface display should be started is set in the drawing list.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the sea level display is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2408. In step S 2408, the sea surface object PC 19 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. In step S2409, the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are grasped as control targets based on the currently set data table.

  In the following step S2410, the pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD already read to the work RAM 132 is updated so as to increase by 1. In step S2411, the update data corresponding to the updated pointer information is grasped. . Specifically, the combination of the reference coordinate data and the orientation data set corresponding to the updated pointer information is read out as the update data for the entire data group. Thereafter, in step S2412, the update designation information for the sea level display is stored, and then this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for sea level display is executed as described above, information on the instruction to use the sea surface object PC 19 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the first method is used. Information on instruction to use the line map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is set. In addition, the update data regarding the first stage form grasped in step S2411 is set in the drawing list. Furthermore, the sea surface display update designation information indicating that the sea surface display should be updated is set in the drawing list.

  The pointer information of the sea surface animation data AD may correspond to the total number of frames on which the sea level display is executed, but in the pachinko machine 10, the pointer information is more than the total number of frames on which the sea level display is executed. The number is set low. In this case, the pointer information is in the last order during execution of the sea level display, but is restored to the first pointer information in the next frame in the last order. In view of the fact that the pointer information loops in this way, the movement of the sea surface object PC19 includes the first stage form in which the pointer information is in the last order and the first stage form in which the pointer information is in the first order. It is preferable to have continuity.

  Next, sea level display setting processing executed in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for sea level display is executed in the state of the first display mode, and is executed as a part of the processes in steps S1703 to S1708 in FIG. The sea level display setting process is started when either the sea level display start designation information or the sea level display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the sea surface display start designation information is set in the current drawing list. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, based on the current drawing list, the address at which the sea surface object PC 19 is stored in the memory module 133 is grasped, and the sea surface object PC 19 is read into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. In step S2503, based on the current drawing list, the addresses where the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are stored in the memory module 133 are grasped, and these first normal maps are displayed. The data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 are read into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134.

  In subsequent step S2504, the initial setting data (data extracted from the sea surface animation data AD) set in the current drawing list is grasped, and in step S2505, the sea surface is applied with the grasped initial setting data. The object PC 19 is set in the world coordinate system. As a result, the sea surface object PC19 is set to the world coordinate system in the state of the first stage.

  In subsequent step S2506, initial setting processing of the first normal map data ND1 to the world coordinate system is executed, and in step S2507, initial setting processing of the second normal map data ND2 to the world coordinate system is executed. As a result, the unit normal data UND and the second normal of the first normal map data ND1 are obtained for each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 so as to be in the state described with reference to FIG. The unit normal data UND of the map data ND2 is associated.

  Thereafter, in step S2508, normal parameter setting processing is executed, and then this setting processing ends. The normal parameter setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal parameter is a parameter that determines the direction of the surface data SD, and specifically determines the coordinates of the vertex data constituting the surface data SD.

  In the normal parameter setting processing, first, in step S2601, initialization processing of an application counter provided in the register 153 is executed. In this process, the application counter uses the VDP 135 to specify target surface data SD1 to which change data set in the unit normal data UND of the first normal map data ND1 and the second normal map data ND2 is applied. In the state where the application counter is initialized, numerical information corresponding to the number of surface data SD1 to be applied is set in the application counter.

  In subsequent step S2602, the change data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the first normal map data ND1. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter is grasped, and thereafter the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 is grasped in the first normal map data ND1. To do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read.

  In the subsequent step S2603, the change data is read from the unit normal data UND corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the second normal map data ND2. Specifically, first, the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter is grasped, and thereafter the unit normal data UND associated with the surface data SD1 is grasped in the second normal map data ND2. To do. Then, the change data set in the unit normal data UND is read.

  In subsequent step S2604, a blending process is executed between the change data read from the first normal map data ND1 in step S2602 and the change data read from the second normal map data ND2 in step S2603. In the blending process, as described above, the orientation of the surface data SD1 based on the change data corresponding to the first normal map data ND1, and the orientation of the surface data SD1 based on the change data corresponding to the second normal map data ND2. Each change data is blended so as to be in the middle direction.

  The blend is not limited to a configuration that is performed in the middle of each direction of the surface data SD1 when each change data is applied, and the blend is related to the first normal map data ND1 at a predetermined ratio. It is good also as a structure which becomes the change data side or change data side which concerns on 2nd normal map data ND2.

  In the subsequent step S2605, the change data resulting from the blending in step S2604 is applied to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter. Thereby, the surface data SD1 is changed from the direction in the first stage form to the direction corresponding to the changed data after blending. However, as already described, since the change data is given as a relative change amount based on the form of the first stage, the change data is not applied as it is, but in the form of the first stage. With the direction as a reference, the change is made in the direction corresponding to the changed data after blending and by the corresponding change amount.

  In subsequent step S2606, the surface data SD2 adjacent to the surface data SD1 corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter, that is, the surface data SD2 sharing the vertex data with the surface data SD1 to be applied (the buffer data already described). A process of changing the direction of the surface data SD2) according to the change of the coordinates of the shared vertex data is executed. In this case, for the vertex data that is not shared with the current application target surface data SD1, the direction of the adjacent surface data SD2 is changed without changing the coordinates from the first stage form.

  In subsequent step S2607, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter, the numerical information of the application counter is updated so that the target for setting the normal parameter shifts to the next application target surface data SD1.

  Thereafter, in step S2608, whether or not the updated numerical value information of the application counter is information indicating that the setting for all the application target surface data SD1 has been completed, that is, the numerical value information of the application counter is “ Whether or not “0” is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S2608, the process returns to step S2602, and the processing of steps S2602 to S2607 is executed for the new application target surface data SD1, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2608 This setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of the sea surface display setting process (FIG. 42), if a negative determination is made in step S2501, update data (from the sea surface animation data AD) set in the current drawing list in step S2509. In step S2510, the obtained update data is set in the sea surface object PC19 already set in the world coordinate system. In this case, the update data is overwritten on the coordinate and orientation data of each surface data group of the sea surface object PC19. As a result, the sea surface object PC19 is set to the world coordinate system again in the state of the first stage.

  In subsequent step S2511, update processing of the first normal map data ND1 is executed, and in step S2512 update processing of the second normal map data ND2 is executed. Accordingly, the unit normal data UND and the second method of the first normal map data ND1 associated with each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC19 so as to be in the state described with reference to FIG. The unit normal data UND of the line map data ND2 is changed.

  Thereafter, the normal parameter setting process in step S2508 is executed, and then this setting process is terminated. The normal parameter setting process is as described above.

  As described above, the coordinates and orientation in the world coordinate system of each surface data SD constituting the sea surface object PC19 are determined. For these plane data SD, color information is set in the color information setting process in step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). In this case, setting of color information for the surface data SD is performed by a method different from the texture mapping process. Such a method will be described.

  44A to 44C are explanatory diagrams for explaining a method of setting color information in each surface data SD.

  In the color information setting process (step S1009), as shown in FIG. 16, the setting process for each object in the world coordinate system is completed, the setting process in the visual field coordinate system in step S1006, and the clipping process in step S1007. Is executed after. Accordingly, at the timing when the color information setting process is executed, the coordinates and orientation of each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 are already set in a state converted into the visual field coordinate system.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 44A, the viewpoint VD serving as the reference of the visual field coordinate system is set, and the sea surface object PC19 is set so as to be positioned above the viewpoint VD. Yes. That is, the sea level display in the pachinko machine 10 is a display with the underwater background, and is an effect in which the sea level is displayed while looking up from the sea.

  When setting color information for each surface data SD, if a light source is temporarily provided above the sea surface object PC19, the position of the viewpoint VD is determined based on the transmitted light from the light source in relation to the coordinates and orientation of the surface data SD. The surface data SD corresponding to the transmission of the light from the light source and the light from the light source are all above the sea surface object PC19. The data is distributed to the surface data SD corresponding to the reflection and not transmission.

  In this distribution, the light source is not set in the lighting process (step S1008) of the drawing process (FIG. 16), but depending on whether or not the angle of the surface data SD with respect to the viewpoint VD is less than a predetermined angle. The surface data SD is assigned to either a classification with a large amount of transmitted light or a classification with a small amount of transmitted light.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44 (b-1) and 44 (b-2), when the surface data SD is first viewed from the viewpoint VD using the coordinates and orientation data of the surface data SD. The refraction angle β, which is an angle, is calculated. In this calculation, a table in which refraction angle data is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the coordinate and orientation data is read from the memory module 133 and used. A calculation formula program is prepared in advance. The refraction angle may be calculated using the calculation formula.

  Here, the setting of the color information for the surface data SD is based on the premise that light enters the sea surface from the atmosphere. Therefore, the larger the refraction angle β, the larger the incident angle α, and the larger the incident angle α, the light amount. Will be less. Based on this assumption, after calculating the refraction angle β, the VDP 135 determines whether or not the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle. When the refraction angle β is less than a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44B-1), the surface data SD that generates the refraction angle β is classified as having a large amount of transmitted light, and the refraction angle β Is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference angle (for example, in the case of FIG. 44 (b-2)), the surface data SD that causes the refraction angle β is classified as having little transmitted light. Incidentally, the plane data SD that does not have a component facing the component facing the viewpoint VD side, such as when having a component facing the viewpoint VD side, is classified as having little transmitted light. Is done.

  After the above classification, the color information of each surface data SD is determined using a color table CT as shown in FIG. The color table CT is stored in advance in the memory module 133, and a plurality of color Nos. Data and these color NO. The color information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the data. In the color table CT, correlation data that is referred to when determining which color information to apply to the surface data SD is set.

  In this case, color NO. “7” is applied to the surface data SD that is classified as having less transmitted light. On the other hand, color NO. “1” to “6” are applied to the surface data SD classified as having a large amount of transmitted light, and a plurality of types of color information are set for the surface data SD of the classification. . Which color information is set for the surface data SD of the classification is not determined by the direction of the surface data SD, but by the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD.

  Specifically, the vertex data of one corner portion (for example, the lower left corner portion in the state of FIG. 38A) of the surface data SD is used as reference vertex data, and the Z coordinate data of the reference vertex data is: If it is less than or equal to the first-stage threshold “Z1” (that is, if the Z coordinate is closer to the viewpoint VD than “Z1”), “CL1” is selected as the color information, and the first-stage threshold “ If it is greater than Z1 and less than or equal to the second stage threshold “Z2”, “CL2” is selected as the color information, and is greater than the second stage threshold “Z2” and the third stage threshold. When the threshold value is “Z3” or less, “CL3” is selected as the color information. In the same manner, “CL4” and “CL5” are selected corresponding to each threshold range, and the Z-coordinate data of the reference vertex data is larger than “Z5” which is the fifth-stage threshold value. In this case, “CL6” is selected as the color information.

  These color information “CL1” to “CL6” are set so as to become darker toward the rear side. Specifically, the color information “CL1” is set as white, and the color information “CL6” is dark blue. The color information “CL2” to “CL5” is set as an intermediate color between them. Also, the color information “CL7” is set as a darker color than the color information “CL6”, and specifically, is set as a blue color close to black.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for setting color information in each surface data SD will be described.

  FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the color information setting process for sea level display executed in the VDP 135. The sea surface display color information setting process is executed in the color information setting process in step S1009 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). The sea surface display color information setting process is started when either the sea surface display start designation information or the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S2701, the application counter initialization process is executed. In this processing, the application counter has a role for specifying the surface data SD for which color information is set by the VDP 135, and is included in the sea surface object PC 19 in a state where the application counter is initialized. Numerical information corresponding to the number of surface data SD is set in the application counter.

  In the following step S2702, the orientation data is grasped from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the sea surface object PC19, and the refraction angle is calculated from the grasped orientation data in step S2703. In step S2704, it is determined whether or not the calculated refraction angle is equal to or greater than a reference angle.

  If the angle is equal to or larger than the reference angle, in step S2705, the color NO. 7 color information (“CL7”) is set for the surface data SD that is the current target. On the other hand, if the angle is less than the reference angle, in step S2706, the Z coordinate data of the target surface data SD is read out, and in step S2707, the corresponding color NO. . Color information (any one of “CL1” to “CL6”) is set for the current surface data SD.

  After executing the processing of step S2705 or step S2707, in step S2708, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter, the application counter is set so that the target for setting color information shifts to the next plane data SD. Update numeric information of. Thereafter, in step S2709, whether or not the updated numerical value information of the application counter is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD has been completed, that is, the numerical value information of the application counter is “ Whether or not “0” is determined.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2709, the process returns to step S2702, and the processes of steps S2702 to S2708 are performed on the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2709, the color information setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the adjustment process for the sea surface executed by the VDP 135. The sea surface adjustment processing is executed in the background drawing data creation processing in step S1010 in the drawing processing (FIG. 16). More specifically, although omitted in FIG. 27 and the description thereof is omitted, it is executed between step S1802 and step S1803. That is, after the background three-dimensional image data is converted into two-dimensional image data, the adjustment process for the sea surface is executed.

  First, in step S2711, it is determined whether or not any of the sea surface display start designation information and the sea surface display update designation information is set in the current drawing list. If neither is set, the adjustment process is terminated as it is. If either one is set, the adjustment process is terminated after executing the sea surface blurring process in step S2712.

  In the sea surface blurring process, a blurring process using a Gaussian filter is performed on the background two-dimensional image data created using the hidden surface process (step S1802). Specifically, one pixel is extracted from the area corresponding to the sea level display, and a predetermined number (for example, five) of pixels are extracted on both sides in the X-axis direction around the pixel. Thereafter, the weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended (synthesized) with the determined weighting applied. Similarly, a predetermined number (for example, five) of pixels are extracted on both sides in the Y-axis direction with the same pixel as the center. Thereafter, the weighting according to the distance from the center pixel is determined using a Gaussian function, and the color information of each pixel is blended with the determined weighting applied. And the blurring process using the said Gaussian filter is performed with respect to all the pixels which comprise the area | region corresponding to a sea surface display.

  Next, the contents of the sea level display will be described with reference to FIG.

  46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sea level display, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for simply explaining the color information setting mode of the area where the sea level display is performed. .

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), an image showing the sea is displayed in the background in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed. The sea level display SP is made on the upper part of this background. In this case, the direction of the surface data SD for displaying the sea surface is finely controlled, and color information corresponding to the finely controlled state is set, so that the direction of the sea surface is expressed finely. The transmission of light from the atmosphere to the sea is expressed realistically. Therefore, realistic sea level display SP can be performed.

  In addition, since the configuration of the surface data SD is adjusted after the first stage form of the sea surface object PC 19 is set, the large movement of the sea surface is regular, but the regular large movement It is possible to give irregularity to the direction of each surface data SD.

  Further, when the movement of each surface data SD is individually controlled, the normal map data ND1 and ND2 are used, so that it is not necessary to individually change the direction of each surface data SD by calculation. Therefore, the above excellent effects can be achieved while reducing the processing load. In particular, by changing the position of the normal map data ND1, ND2 in the world coordinate system, the unit normal data UND associated with each surface data SD is changed as the sea surface display SP progresses. Since the same normal map data ND1 and ND2 can be used and the same application process can be used when the direction of the surface data SD is changed in a complicated manner with the progress of the sea surface display SP, the storage capacity And the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, the rough movement determination using the sea surface animation data AD is executed by the display CPU 131, and the fine surface direction determination using the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is executed by the VDP 135. The processing load is distributed.

  Further, as described above, when the sea surface blurring process is executed, as shown in FIG. 46B, the pixel PS (left pixel) in which color information corresponding to almost no light transmission is set. PS) and a pixel PS (right side pixel PS) for which color information corresponding to the most light transmission is set (right side pixel PS) is a pixel PS (center side) obtained by blending the color information of both pixels PS. Pixel PS). Thereby, it becomes possible to make the boundary of the portion where the color information is different inconspicuous in the configuration in which the color information is individually set in the area where the sea level display SP is performed.

  In addition, since the blurring process is performed after the two-dimensional image is generated, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the blurring process is performed in the state of the three-dimensional image.

<Another form of color information setting process for sea level display>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the color information setting process for sea level display executed in the VDP 135.

  First, in step S2801, similarly to step S2701, the application counter initialization process is executed. In the subsequent step S2802, as in step S2702, the orientation data is obtained from the surface data SD corresponding to the current numerical information of the application counter in the sea surface object PC19. In step S2803, as in step S2703, The refraction angle is calculated from the data of the grasped orientation.

  In the subsequent step S2804, color information is derived from the refraction angle information calculated in step S2803. In this case, when the color information is derived, the color table in which the refraction angle information and the color information are associated is read from the memory module 133, and the color information corresponding to the refraction angle information is read. That is, in this embodiment, the color information is read directly from the refraction angle information.

  Thereafter, in step S2805, the Z coordinate data of the target surface data SD is read, and in step S2806, color information adjustment processing corresponding to the read Z coordinate data is executed. In this case, a process is executed in which the amount of shift when the color information set in step S2804 is shifted to the darker color side is larger for the surface data SD that is farther from the viewpoint VD.

  In subsequent step S2807, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the application counter, the numerical information of the application counter is updated so that the target for setting the color information shifts to the next surface data SD. Thereafter, in step S2808, whether or not the updated numerical value information of the application counter is information indicating that the setting of the color information for all the surface data SD has been completed, that is, the numerical value information of the application counter is “ Whether or not “0” is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S2808, the process returns to step S2802, and the processes of steps S2802 to S2807 are executed for the new surface data SD. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S2808, the color information setting process is terminated.

<Other alternative forms>
The number of unit normal data UND included in one normal map data ND1, ND2 may be equal to or less than the number of surface data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, unit normal data UND may be associated with all the surface data SD by arranging a plurality of the same normal map data ND1 and ND2.

  A plurality of types of normal map data ND1 and ND2 do not need to be set, and a single normal map data may be set. In this case, when displaying the sea surface, only the single normal map data may be applied to the sea surface object PC19. Even in this configuration, by changing the position of the normal map data applied to the sea surface object PC 19, the direction of each surface data SD can be changed as the sea surface display progresses. In addition, a plurality of the single normal map data are simultaneously read out, and the positions applied to the sea surface object PC 19 in the plurality of normal map data are made different from each other, thereby making it possible to control the orientation of a complicated surface. It is good also as composition to do.

  The target to which the unit normal data UND of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is applied is limited to a configuration in which a plurality of surface data SD sharing the same vertex data are not applied simultaneously. Instead, the unit normal data UND may be applied to the entire data SD. However, in this configuration, since different coordinates are set simultaneously for one vertex data, it is necessary to separately adjust the coordinates. For example, the priority when the coordinates of the vertex data are set is determined in advance between the adjacent surface data SD, and the unit normal data UND is applied as it is to the surface data SD with a high priority, and the surface with a low priority. The data SD is closer to the direction determined by the unit normal data UND applied to itself than the state of the first stage form, while maintaining the coordinates of the vertex data determined by the surface data SD having a high priority. It is good also as a structure adjusted as follows.

  The setting of the color information for each surface data SD is not limited to the setting method using the color table CT or the setting method shown in FIG. 47. For example, the lighting of the drawing process (FIG. 16) A virtual light source may be set on the opposite side of the viewpoint VD across the sea surface object PC19 in the processing, and the amount of light transmitted from the virtual light source may be calculated individually for each surface data SD. In this case, a configuration is conceivable in which color information corresponding to the amount of transmitted light is derived using predetermined table information, and the color information of the derivation result is set in each surface data SD. In addition, initial color information is preset for each surface data SD, and a configuration in which the color information is adjusted in relation to the calculated transmission amount is conceivable.

  The sea surface object PC19 is not limited to the configuration set above the viewpoint VD, and the sea surface object PC19 may be configured below the viewpoint VD. In this case, after the direction of each surface data SD is determined by each of the above methods, if the direction of each surface data SD is a direction that easily reflects light, bright color information is set, and the direction of each surface data SD is If the direction is easy to transmit light, dark color information is set. For this setting, table information prepared in advance may be used, or a configuration may be used in which actual calculation is performed using a virtual light source.

  For the surface data SD whose derived refraction angle is equal to or smaller than a predetermined angle, the brightest color information may be set regardless of the distance in the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD. Alternatively, for the surface data SD whose derived refraction angle is equal to or smaller than a predetermined angle, color information brighter than other refraction angles is set, and the color information is used as a base from the viewpoint VD. The color information may be adjusted so that it becomes darker as the distance in the Z-axis direction increases.

  The processing configuration for setting the color information by controlling the direction of the surface as described above does not have to be the sea surface, and may be another water surface such as a river or a pond. Further, when expressing a transmissive film or a reflective film that changes the state of the surface over time, a processing configuration that sets the color information by controlling the direction of the surface as described above may be applied.

  The target of the parameter controlled using the map data is not limited to the orientation and coordinates, and may be the surface color or the surface transparency value.

  The number of unit normal data UND included in the normal map data ND1, ND2 may be smaller than the number of surface data SD included in the sea surface object PC19. In this case, one normal map data ND1, ND2 is applied to a predetermined number of surface data SD in the sea surface object PC19, and the same normal map data ND1, ND2 is applied again to the remaining surface data SD. Apply.

  In the normal parameter setting process (FIG. 43), the process of step S2606, that is, the adjustment process of adjacent surface data may not be executed. In this case, for the buffer surface data SD2, the vertex data shared with the surface data SD1 to be applied among the plurality of vertex data included in the surface data SD2 is associated with the application of the normal map data ND1 and ND2. Although the vertex data is changed but not shared, the coordinates set in the first stage form are maintained. Even in this case, the direction and size of the buffer surface data SD2 are changed according to the change in the direction and size of the surface data SD1 to be applied.

  Instead of the normal map data ND1 and ND2 that directly control the direction of the surface data SD, map data that directly controls the coordinates of each vertex data of the sea surface object PC19 may be used. In this case, by applying the map data to the sea surface object PC19, the coordinates of the vertex data are changed, and the direction of the surface data SD is changed as a result of the change. In this configuration, since the control target is not a surface but a vertex, the separation between the application target surface data SD1 and the buffer surface data SD2 as in the case of using the normal map data ND1 and ND2 is performed. There is no need to do it. Note that the control amount of each vertex data set in the map data is preferably a change amount from the coordinates in the first stage form.

  A configuration in which the sea surface object PC 19 is distinguished into a plurality of surface data groups is not essential, and a configuration in which such a distinction is not made may be employed. In this case, each surface data SD of the sea surface object PC 19 is individually controlled using the normal map data ND1, ND2, and the like.

  The setting of the first stage based on performing the control in units of surface data groups at the same update timing and the individual control of the direction of the surface data SD using the normal map data ND1, ND2, etc. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which both are performed. For example, the configuration of the first stage is set at one update timing, individual control of the direction of the surface data SD is performed at the next and subsequent update timings, and further, It is good also as a structure to repeat. In this case, the processing load at one update timing can be reduced.

  -It is not limited to the structure which selects color information according to the distance of the Z-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, Color information is selected according to the distance from the viewpoint VD defined by X coordinate, Y coordinate, and Z coordinate. It is good also as a structure. Alternatively, the color information may be selected according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the viewpoint VD, or the color information may be selected according to the distance in the Y-axis direction. Further, the color information may be selected according to the rotation position and scale of the target object instead of the distance from the viewpoint VD.

<Configuration for focus display>
Next, a configuration for performing focus display will be described.

  In focus display, when multiple types of individual images are simultaneously displayed on the display surface G as if the positions in the depth direction of the display surface G are different from each other, they are present at a predetermined position or range in the depth direction. The individual image is in focus, and the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved part, and the outer edge of the individual image are clearly displayed. The individual images displayed as described above are out of focus, and the display effect is displayed in a state where the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the curved portion, and the outer edge portion are blurred and blurred.

  The focus display is executed during the opening / closing execution mode during game play and during the opening / closing execution mode, which has a relatively low processing load for image display. In other words, during game play, the display CPU 131 task processing (FIG. 14) causes step S903 to be performed because it is necessary to perform variable display of symbols in accordance with predetermined animation data in each of the symbol rows SA1 to SA3. At least the process of step S905 is executed. On the other hand, during the opening / closing execution mode, it is not necessary to perform symbol variation display in each of the symbol columns SA1 to SA3. Therefore, in the task processing (FIG. 14) of the display CPU 131, step S903 and step S904 are executed. S905 is not executed. Accordingly, the processing load on the display CPU 131 is reduced during the opening / closing execution mode, and thus the control for focus display is executed using the reduced amount.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect calculation processing in the opening / closing execution mode executed by the display CPU 131. The effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). Further, the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is activated when a data table corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is set.

  First, in step S2901, an effect object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S2901, the setting process for starting control (step S901) for the effect object is completed. In subsequent step S2902, the control information is updated by calculating various parameters of the grasped object for presentation.

  In the subsequent step S2903, the teaching object to be updated this time is grasped based on the currently set data table. The teaching object is an object that is used when displaying an image that allows the player to teach the game status to the player. For example, if a round is in progress, the current round is the number of the round. Such contents are taught using a teaching object (see FIG. 52). In addition, information on the combination type of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed on the active line in the game times that trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is taught using the teaching object (see FIG. 52). Incidentally, at the execution timing of the processing of step S2903, the setting processing for starting control (step S901) for the teaching object is completed. In a succeeding step S2904, various parameters of the grasped object are calculated and the control information is updated.

  In the subsequent step S2905, it is determined whether or not it is the focus effect period in the opening / closing execution mode based on the currently set data table. The focus effect period is a period during which a focus display can be performed based on the operation of the effect operation device 48 by the player. In the present pachinko machine 10, a focus production period is set as a part of the opening / closing execution mode, and specifically, a predetermined round such as the first round (that is, a period during which winning to the variable winning device 22 is possible). ) Is set to the focus production period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a focus production period may be set for a plurality of rounds, a focus production period may be set in the opening or ending, and a focus production period may be set between rounds. The focus production period may be set over a predetermined round and the next round, and the entire opening / closing execution mode may be set as the round production period.

  If it is not the focus effect period (step S2905: NO), the effect effect calculation process is terminated. When the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes an instruction to use the effect object obtained in step S2901. Information is set together with information on texture use instructions corresponding to these objects. In addition, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set in the drawing list, and further, information on the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904 The calculated parameter is set.

  If it is the focus production period (step S2905: YES), it is determined in step S2906 whether it is the focus selection period. In the focus effect period, a focus selection period in which the player can select a focus over a predetermined number of frames (a predetermined plurality of image update timings) such as 300 frames from the start timing is set. The focus display execution period is set to be performed when the player selects a focus selection instruction during the focus selection period based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. This pin and display execution period is performed until the end of the round to be executed. The individual images that are subject to focus selection during the focus selection period will continue to be displayed during the subsequent focus display execution period, so it is possible to perform focus display that reflects the results of focus selection during the focus selection period. It becomes.

  The focus display execution period is executed over a predetermined plurality of frames (a predetermined plurality of image update timings) such as at least 500 frames. Also, a predetermined round may be set as the focus selection period, and the subsequent rounds may be set as the focus display execution period.

  If it is the focus selection period (step S2906: YES), the focus adjustment parameter adjustment processing is executed in step S2907, and the focus selection execution designation information is stored in step S2908. Operation processing is terminated.

  When the effect calculation processing in the opening / closing execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing includes an instruction to use the effect object grasped in step S2901. Is set together with information on the instruction to use the texture corresponding to these objects. In addition, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set in the drawing list, and further, information on the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904 The calculated parameter is set. Further, in the drawing list, a focus selection parameter is set as the parameter of the effect object grasped in step S2901, and execution selection information for focus selection is set.

  Here, in the focus selection period, a display that allows the player to recognize that individual images that enable focus selection on the display surface G are gradually switched. For example, in a state where a plurality of individual images are displayed at the same time as if they are arranged shifted in the depth direction of the display surface G, the plurality of individual images are sequentially shifted to a focus selectable state. Any method can be used to select the focus selectable state. For example, the annular portion is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the individual image, and the annular portion is blinked, the individual image is enlarged, or the individual image is displayed. A configuration in which an image is enlarged and then reduced and a separate image indicating an individual image is displayed. Such a focus selectable state display is executed by referring to the focus selection parameter in the VDP 135 in a situation where a drawing list in which focus selection execution designation information is set is output.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the individual image that can be focused is an individual image for effect displayed in front of the background, but a background image may be included.

  On the other hand, if it is not the focus selection period (step S2906: NO), the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether focus display is being executed. If focus display is not being executed, it is determined in step S2910 whether or not a focus instruction command has been received from the sound emission control device 60. The focus instruction command is a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 at the end timing of the focus selection period when the player has made a focus selection instruction in the focus selection period. Information on individual images for which focus selection is instructed is included.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2910, the present process ends. When the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process makes a negative determination in step S2905 and ends the effect calculation process. The same information as that in the case of the above is set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, a focus range calculation process is executed in step S2911. In the focus range calculation process, a process for calculating a focus range is performed from the information of the individual image that is the focus selection instruction target included in the focus instruction command. In this case, since the type of the individual image displayed in the focus production period is already determined at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the data of the focus range is associated with the individual image to be focused on one-to-one. Is predetermined as a focus range table. Accordingly, in step S2911, first, the focus range table is read from the memory module 133, and the data of the focus range corresponding to the individual image that is the focus selection instruction target is read. Thereafter, in step S2912, after the execution designation information for the focus effect is stored, the present effect calculation process is terminated.

  When the effect calculation processing in the opening / closing execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output processing includes an instruction to use the effect object grasped in step S2901. Is set together with information on the instruction to use the texture corresponding to these objects. In addition, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set in the drawing list, and further, information on the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904 The calculated parameter is set. In addition, in the drawing list, the focus range data calculated in step S2911 is set, and the focus production execution designation information is stored.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, the focus display execution state is entered. The setting to the execution state of the focus display is performed, for example, by setting “1” in a flag for distinguishing whether or not the focus display is in the execution state in the data table. If the focus display execution state is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S2909, and after the focus production execution designation information is stored in step S2912, the effect production calculation process ends.

  When the effect calculation process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed as described above, the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process includes an instruction to use the effect object obtained in step S2901. Information is set together with information on texture use instructions corresponding to these objects. In addition, the parameter calculated in step S2902 is set in the drawing list, and further, information on the instruction to use the teaching object grasped in step S2903 is set, and in step S2904 The calculated parameter is set. In addition, in the drawing list, focus range data corresponding to the current focus effect is set, and execution specification information for the focus effect is set.

  In the VDP 135, based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, image display for the focus selection period and image display for the focus display execution period are performed. In this case, with respect to the image display for the focus selection period, the individual images that are in the focus selectable state as described above are sequentially obtained based on executing the drawing process (FIG. 16) while referring to the focus selection parameters. A switching image display is performed. On the other hand, the image display for the focus display execution period is performed by executing the process for adjusting the focus after executing the process of shifting from the state of the three-dimensional image data to the state of the two-dimensional image data. .

  Hereinafter, a specific configuration for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 will be described. FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the VRAM 134 used for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 having a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b, and a Z buffer 143. Each of the buffers 142 and 143 is as described above. In each frame area 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142, drawing data which is two-dimensional data referred to when drawing on the symbol display device 31 is executed. The Z buffer 143 is used to temporarily store coordinate data in the Z-axis direction when executing the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18).

  In addition to the buffers 142 and 143, the VRAM 134 is provided with a blurring buffer 181 as an area for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135. The blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas as the frame regions 142a and 142b. That is, the frame regions 142a and 142b have the same number of unit areas, and the blurring buffer 181 has the same number of unit areas. The blurring buffer 181 can temporarily store a drawing list created in one frame area as it is.

  If the drawing list can be temporarily stored as it is, the number of unit areas in the blurring buffer 181 may be larger than the number of unit areas included in one frame region.

  The process for adjusting the focus in the VDP 135 is executed in the drawing data composition process in step S1012 in the drawing process (FIG. 16). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing the drawing data synthesis process.

  In the drawing data composition process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not execution designation information for focus effect is set in the current drawing list. If not set, the process proceeds to step S3002.

  In step S3002, the background drawing data already created in step S1010 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the current frame regions 142a and 142b. Thereafter, in step S3003, the rendering area and design drawing data already created in the immediately preceding step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144 are used as the frame area 142a in which the background drawing data is written as described above. , 142b, the synthesis process is terminated.

  In this case, drawing data for effects and symbols is written with reference to the α value, as already described. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode, there is no symbol in the rendering data for effects and symbols, and only data corresponding to the individual images for effects exists. Furthermore, in the opening / closing execution mode, data for individual images for teaching created based on pasting a texture for teaching to a teaching object is included in rendering data for effects and symbols. For the individual image data for teaching, rendering data for effects and symbols is created so that the data of other individual images do not overlap from the front side.

  On the other hand, if focus execution execution designation information is set in the current drawing list, the process advances to step S3004. In step S3004, as in step S3002, the background drawing data already created in step S1010 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the current frame regions 142a and 142b. In the subsequent step S3005, as in the above step S3003, the rendering data for effects and symbols already created in the previous step S1011 and stored in the screen buffer 144 is written in the background drawing data as described above. Are written in the frame areas 142a and 142b. Thereafter, in step S3006, after performing the adjustment process for the focus effect, the synthesis process is terminated.

  FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing adjustment processing for focus production.

  In the adjustment process for the focus effect, first, in steps S3101 to S3107, a blur map creation process for creating blur map data to be referred to for executing the focus effect is executed. In the blur map data, in the drawing data which is two-dimensional image data, the color information set in each unit area of the frame regions 142a and 142b in which the drawing data is created is changed in the state of the three-dimensional image data. This is map data for specifying in the VDP 135 whether or not the coordinate in the Z-axis direction was present. That is, the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the unit areas of the frame regions 142a and 142b.

  Here, as already described, the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for effects and symbols are set for each object in the world coordinate system in the drawing process (FIG. 16) (steps S1002 to S1004). Then, through the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (step S1005), the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (step S1006) is executed, and in that state, the clipping process (step S1007), the lighting process (step S1008), and the color It is created after the information setting process (step S1009) is executed. In this case, since each drawing data is created for the frame regions 142a and 142b, color information setting processing is performed in the visual field coordinate system as described above when creating the drawing data. The data state is maintained, and is maintained until a new drawing process is started even after drawing data is created. Then, blur map data is created using data in a state where color information setting processing is performed in this visual field coordinate system.

  In the blur map creation process, blur map data is created based on performing the same process as the hidden surface process (FIG. 18) using the Z buffer 143. However, in the hidden surface processing (FIG. 18), drawing data for background is created only for image data for background, and drawing data for production and design is processed only for rendering data for production and design. In the blur map creation process, all image data clipped in the visual field coordinate system are collectively handled as a processing target without making such distinction.

  Specifically, in the blur map creation process, first, in step S3101, an individual image included on the Z axis on the basis of the current projection target dot in the screen area PC 12 (see FIG. 17) The Z value set for the target pixel of the individual image to be tested is grasped. In the subsequent step S3102, the Z value set in the dot area corresponding to the drawing target dot on the one-to-one basis in the Z buffer 143 is grasped.

  In the following step S3103, it is determined whether or not the Z value of the individual image grasped in step S3101 corresponds to the near side in the Z-axis direction with respect to the Z value of the Z buffer 143 grasped in step S3102. If it corresponds to the near side, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the Z value obtained in step S3101 is overwritten on the area of the dot referenced in step S3102 in the Z buffer 143. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3105.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that it does not correspond to the near side, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing the process in step S3104. In other words, when the Z value of the pixel to be tested is the same as the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143 or on the far side in the Z axis direction, the Z buffer 143 is not updated. . On the other hand, if the Z value of the pixel to be tested is closer to the Z-axis direction than the Z value already set for the target dot in the Z buffer 143, the Z buffer 143 is updated.

  In step S3105, it is determined whether or not the Z test has been completed for all target pixels included on the Z axis with respect to the projection target dot. If not completed, the process returns to step S3101 to perform a Z test on the new target pixel.

  If completed, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the Z test has been completed for all dots in the screen area PC12. If not completed, the projection target dot is updated in step S3107, and the process returns to step S3101 to perform a Z test on the new projection target dot. If completed, it means that the creation of the blur map data has been completed, and the process advances to step S3108.

  By creating the blur map data as described above, the VDP 135 determines what coordinates the color information corresponding to each unit area of the composite drawing data has in the Z-axis direction. Is possible. Therefore, the relative positional relationship in the depth direction can be specified by the VDP 135 for the color information corresponding to each unit area.

  In the adjustment process for the focus effect, the process proceeds to step S3108 after the blur map data is created in steps S3101 to S3107.

  In step S3108, the combined drawing data created in the drawing target frame regions 142a and 142b by the processing in steps S3004 and S3005 in the drawing data combining process (FIG. 49B) is stored in the blurring buffer 181. In subsequent step S3109, the data of the focus range set in the current drawing list is read out.

  Thereafter, in step S3110 to step S3117, the blurring process is executed based on the read focus range data. In the blurring process, a determination process for determining whether or not the unit areas in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn this time are the execution target of the blurring process is performed, and the unit area determined to be the execution target is executed. , Processing for causing blurring is executed, and further, these processing are executed for all the unit areas included in the frame regions 142a and 142b to be drawn this time.

  Here, for the unit area whose coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponds to the focus range, the blurring process is not executed, but the focus range corresponds to a single coordinate data in the Z-axis direction. Instead, it corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous in the Z-axis direction as shown in FIG. That is, the focus range is set to have a certain depth of field so that the image displayed on the display surface G is not excessively blurred. Specifically, the focus range is arbitrary, but in the state of the three-dimensional image data, it is set to be a range that can include the entire individual image for one effect having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction. It is preferable.

  The unit area in which the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction is out of the focus range is set so that the degree of blurring increases as the distance from the focus range increases. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50B, the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are set so that the degree of blur increases stepwise as the distance from the focus range increases. Is set.

  The first blur range is set so as to be continuous from the focus range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous on the side away from the focus range in the Z-axis direction. The first blur range exists on both the back side and the near side of the focus range. The second blur range is set so as to be continuous from the first blur range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data that are continuous on the side away from the focus range and the first blur range in the Z-axis direction. The second blur range exists both on the further back side of the first blur range on the back side and on the further front side of the first blur range on the near side. The third blur range is set so as to be continuous from the second blur range, and corresponds to a plurality of coordinate data continuous in the Z-axis direction and away from the focus range, the first blur range, and the second blur range. doing. The third blur range exists both on the further back side of the second blur range on the back side and on the further front side of the second blur range on the near side.

  Specifically, the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range are arbitrary, but in the state of the three-dimensional image data, the entire individual image for rendering having a predetermined thickness in the Z-axis direction It is preferable that each is set so as to be in a range in which can be included. In this case, the number of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range is the same and the number of coordinate data is the same as the focus range. It may be different from the focus range or different from each other. For example, a configuration in which the number of coordinate data in the Z-axis direction included in the blur range farther from the focus range may be increased.

  As described above, since the focus range is changed based on the operation of the player's operation device for presentation 48, the data for the focus range stored in advance in the memory module 133 is included in the focus range. It is set as data of the number of coordinate data continuous in the Z-axis direction. Then, based on the operation of the effect operating device 48 by the player, the coordinate in the Z-axis direction which is a reference for setting the focus range is determined, and the Z included in the focus range data is determined based on the coordinate. The focus range is set by converting the number of coordinate data in the axial direction as the range of the actual coordinate data. In this case, it is preferable to set the reference coordinate in the Z-axis direction for setting the focus range as the foremost coordinate or the deepest coordinate in the focus range. Setting the focus range by simply adding the number of coordinate data set in the focus range data to the reference coordinate by setting it as the foremost coordinate. It becomes possible. Even if it is set as the farthest coordinate, the focus range can be obtained by simply subtracting the number of coordinate data set in the focus range data from the reference coordinate. Can be set.

  Similarly, for the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range, the data for each blur range stored in advance in the memory module 133 is in the Z-axis direction that is included in the blur range. It is set as data of the number of continuous coordinate data. Then, based on the focus range determined as described above, coordinates serving as a reference for each blur range are determined, and by applying the data for each blur range to the reference coordinates, each blur range is determined. It becomes possible to set.

  As described above, the first blur range, the second blur range, and the third blur range can be set for each of the near side and the far side of the focus range. As described above, the focus range is determined by the player. It is determined based on the operation of the production operating device 48. In this case, the focus range may be set in correspondence with the individual image for presentation that exists closest to the front. In this case, each blurring range is set only on the back side with respect to the focus range.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 50A, in the blurring process, first, in step S3110, coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to the current unit area is read from the blur map data created in steps S3101 to S3107. In subsequent step S3111, it is determined whether or not the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read in step S3110 is included in the focus range read in step S3109. If it is included in the focus range, it is not necessary to execute the process of causing blur for the unit area, and the process proceeds to step S3116 without executing the processes of steps S3112 to S3115.

  If it is not included in the focus range, it is determined in step S3112 whether or not the current unit area corresponds to a teaching area for displaying a teaching individual image. The individual image for teaching is an image displayed using the teaching object already described. If it corresponds to the teaching area, the process proceeds to step S3116 without executing the processes of steps S3113 to S3115. That is, the process for causing the blur is not performed on the individual images for teaching. Thus, even when a focus effect is performed, it is possible to suitably teach information using a teaching individual image.

  By the way, the position where the individual image for teaching is displayed is unchanged regardless of the operation mode of the effect operating device 48 by the player, and therefore the address of the unit area included in the teaching area is determined in advance. The data is stored in the memory module 133 in advance.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. In step S3113, blurring area determination processing is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether the coordinate data in the Z-axis direction read in step S3110 is included in the first blur range, the second blur range, or the third blur range, and blur is generated. To determine the target blur range. Thereafter, blur generation processing is executed in step S3114.

  The blur generation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the first blurring range is determined in step S3113. If the first blur range is determined, in step S3202, the first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the current unit area, and the color from each of these unit areas is determined. Extract information. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181 instead of from the frame regions 142a and 142b to be drawn this time. In step S3202, the color information set in the current unit area is also extracted. This extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the subsequent step S3203, blurring generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. In the blur generation process, blurring is generated using a Gaussian filter. In other words, with the unit area that is the subject of this time as the center, weighting according to the distance in the X-axis direction from the unit area that is the center is determined using a Gaussian function for each of the extracted unit areas. Then, in a state where the determined weighting is applied, the color information of the central unit area and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended. The color information of the blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

  In the subsequent step S3204, a first predetermined number of unit areas are specified in each of the Y-axis directions with reference to the current unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S 3204, the color information set in the current unit area is also extracted. This extraction is also performed from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the subsequent step S3205, a blur generation process in the Y-axis direction is executed. In the blur generation process, blurring is generated using a Gaussian filter. In other words, with the unit area that is the subject of this time as a center, weighting according to the distance in the Y-axis direction from the unit area that is the center is determined using a Gaussian function for each of the extracted unit areas. Then, in a state where the determined weighting is applied, the color information of the central unit area and the color information of the extracted unit area are blended. The color information of the blend result is temporarily stored in the register 153.

  Thereafter, blend processing is executed in step S3206. Specifically, the blend result color information calculated in step S3203 and the blend result color information calculated in step S3205 are blended at the same ratio. Thereafter, the blur generation process ends.

  By executing the blur generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-1), the first predetermined number is provided on each side of the X-axis direction on the basis of the unit area that is the current target. Each color information set in the unit area of minutes and each color information set in the first predetermined number of unit areas on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the unit area that is the current target. Blended with information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not the second blur range is determined in step S3113. When the second blur range is determined, in step S3208, a second predetermined number of unit areas greater than the first predetermined number are specified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the current unit area. Color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3208, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the subsequent step S3209, blurring generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this processing are the same as in step S3203.

  In the subsequent step S3210, a second predetermined number of unit areas larger than the first predetermined number are specified in each of the Y-axis directions with reference to the current unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3210, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

  In a succeeding step S3211, a blur generation process in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this process are the same as in step S3205.

  Thereafter, in step S3212, blend processing is executed. Specifically, the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3209 and the color information of the blend result calculated in step S3211 are blended at the same ratio. Thereafter, the blur generation process ends.

  By executing the blur generation process as described above, as shown in FIG. 51 (b-2), the second predetermined number is provided on each side in the X-axis direction with reference to the unit area that is the current target. Each color information set in the unit area of minutes and each color information set in the second predetermined number of unit areas on both sides in the Y-axis direction are the colors of the unit area that is the object of this time Blended with information. In this case, since the number of unit areas to be blended is larger than in the case of FIG. 51 (b-1), the degree of blurring is greater in the second blur range than in the first blur range. Become.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3207, it means that the third blur range has been determined in step S3113. If the third blur range is determined, in step S3213, a third predetermined number of unit areas greater than the second predetermined number are specified in each of the X-axis directions with reference to the current unit area. Color information is extracted from each of these unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3213, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

  In the subsequent step S3214, blurring generation processing in the X-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this processing are the same as in step S3203.

  In subsequent step S3215, a third predetermined number of unit areas larger than the second predetermined number are specified in each of the Y-axis directions with reference to the current unit area, and color information is extracted from each of the unit areas. This extraction is performed from the blurring buffer 181. In step S3215, the color information set in the current unit area is extracted from the blurring buffer 181.

  In a succeeding step S3216, a blur generation process in the Y-axis direction is executed. The specific contents of this process are the same as in step S3205.

  Thereafter, blend processing is executed in step S3217. Specifically, the blend result color information calculated in step S3214 and the blend result color information calculated in step S3216 are blended at the same ratio. Thereafter, the blur generation process ends. By executing the blur generation process as described above, it is possible to make the degree of blur larger than in the second blur range.

  Returning to the description of the adjustment process for the focus effect (FIG. 50A), after executing the blur generation process in step S3114, in step S3115, the color information of the result calculated in the blur generation process is displayed. After overwriting the current unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be rendered, the process proceeds to step S3116. As a result, the color information corresponding to each blur range is set in the unit area.

  Here, in the configuration in which the color information resulting from the blurring is sequentially set in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, in the blur generation process, the frame areas 142a and 142b are as described above. The color information is read from the blurring buffer 181 instead of reading the color information. As a result, when blurring is generated in a predetermined unit area, it is possible to prevent color information that has already been generated from blurring from being used. Therefore, it is possible to cause blurring in a manner that does not depend on the order in which blurring generation processing is executed.

  In step S3116, it is determined whether or not all the unit areas of the current drawing target frame regions 142a and 142b have been subjected to the processing in steps S310 to S3115. If not completed, the target unit area is updated in step S3117, and then the process returns to step S3110 to execute the processes in steps S3110 to S3115 for the new target unit area. If it has been completed, this adjustment process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the focus display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52A shows a state where focus display is not performed, and FIG. 52B shows a state where focus display is performed.

  In a state where focus display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), individual images CH11, CH12, CH13 for each effect, background images (sea surface images, sand beach images, and sky images) CH14 and The individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching are both in focus. Therefore, in each of these images CH11 to CH16, the boundary of the pattern, the boundary of the bent portion, and the outer edge portion are clearly displayed.

  On the other hand, in the state in which the focus display is performed, as shown in FIG. 52B, the focus individual range CH11 and the background image CH14 of the sandy beach portion where the individual image CH11 exists are in focus range. However, the individual images CH12 and CH13 for other effects and the background image CH14 of other parts are out of the focus range, so the boundaries of the pattern and the bends are displayed. The boundary of the part and the outer edge part are displayed in a blurred state, and are unclear. In particular, the degree of the blurred state increases as the distance from the individual image CH11 for presentation included in the focus range to the far side and the far side in the depth direction of the display surface G increases. ing. This allows the player to recognize that the effect individual image CH11 is in focus.

  However, even in a state where focus display is being performed, as shown in FIG. 52B, the individual images for teaching CH15 and CH16 are clearly displayed as in FIG. 52A. As a result, even if focus display is performed, it is possible to satisfactorily teach information using the individual images CH15 and CH16 for teaching. Further, the individual images for teaching CH15 and CH16 are displayed as if they are arranged on the near side of the other images, so even if they are excluded from the blur generation target, they are excluded from the focus display target. Can be clearly recognized by the player being played, and the focus display can be performed well.

  In the focus display, the blur map data is not stored in the memory module 133 in advance, but is generated by the VDP 135 each time. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity. In particular, in the configuration that allows the player to actively participate in the game by setting the focus range based on the operation of the effect operating device 48 by the player, the blur map data is set in advance. If you try to do so, the data capacity will be enormous. Further, if it is attempted to suppress the increase in the data capacity, the focus range pattern that can be selected based on the operation of the effect operating device 48 is reduced. On the other hand, as described above, the blur map data is created each time in the VDP 135, so that it is possible to suitably promote the player's active participation in the game while reducing the data capacity. It becomes.

  On the other hand, if the blur map data is created as described above, the processing load of the VDP 135 increases accordingly. On the other hand, when the blur is generated, it is necessary not to perform the process in the state of the three-dimensional image but to perform the process in the state of the two-dimensional image. This reduces the processing load for generating blurring.

<Another form of focus display>
The blur map data is not limited to the configuration for creating the drawing data, and the blur map data may be stored in the memory module 133 in advance. In this case, if the focus range is selected based on the operation of the production operation device 48, it is necessary to create blur map data in advance in correspondence with all variations related to the selection. In addition, if the focus range is not selected based on the operation of the production operation device 48 and the blur display is performed in a certain manner, the blur map data corresponding to that mode may be created in advance.

  In the configuration in which the blur map data is created in advance as described above, the data set to correspond to each unit area in the blur map data does not need to be coordinate data in the Z-axis direction, and the focus range, Also, it may be data indicating which range of the blur ranges corresponds.

  The averaging process of color information for causing blurring does not need to be performed after converting the three-dimensional image data into the two-dimensional image data, and may be performed in the state of the three-dimensional image data. In this case, when blending the surrounding pixels with the reference pixel, the distance from the reference pixel to the surrounding pixels is calculated in a three-dimensional state, and weighting is performed according to the calculation result. Is applied to the color information of the surrounding pixels.

  The averaging process of color information for causing blurring may be configured to blend the extracted color information evenly, instead of performing weighting according to the distance from the center using a Gaussian function. In this case, although the realism of the blur display is reduced, the processing load can be reduced.

  The averaging process of color information for causing blurring is not limited to the configuration performed for each of the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction, and may be configured for only one of them. In this case, although the realism of the blur display is reduced, the processing load can be reduced.

  The color information averaging process for causing blurring is limited to a configuration in which the drawing data set in the drawing target frame areas 142a and 142b is stored separately in the blurring buffer 181. The frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn may be used as they are. In this case, when the color information of a predetermined unit area is blurred, the color information of the unit area that has already been blurred is used, and the order of processing that causes the blur affects the degree of blur. However, since it is not necessary to separately provide the blurring buffer 181, the storage capacity can be reduced, and it is not necessary to perform another storage in the blurring buffer 181, thereby reducing the processing load. It is done.

  A buffer other than the Z buffer 143 may be used when creating the blur map data. In this case, a dedicated buffer for creating blur map data may be provided in the VRAM 134.

  The drawing data for background and the drawing data for effects and symbols are individually created and combined to create drawing data for one frame, but color information setting processing is performed in step S1009. After execution, the drawing data for one frame may be created collectively. In this configuration, when drawing data for one frame is created using hidden surface processing, coordinate data in the Z-axis direction corresponding to each unit area is set in the Z buffer 143. Therefore, the data created in the Z buffer 143 by this hidden surface process can be used as it is as the blur map data.

  -You may make it perform a focus display as an effect for game times. In this case, the symbols that are variably displayed in the symbol rows SA1 to SA3 may be excluded from the blurring target, as in the case where the individual images for teaching are excluded from the blurring target as described above. If the focus display is performed as an effect during the reach, the symbols forming the reach line may be excluded from the blur target on the symbol sequences SA1 and SA3 that have been stopped and displayed first. In addition to or instead of this, the symbols in the final stop symbol sequence SA2 may be excluded from the blurring target. By excluding the symbols forming the reach line, it becomes possible to use the focus display as a reach effect without reducing the distinguishability of the type of the reach symbol, and the symbols of the final stop symbol sequence SA2 are excluded. Thus, the focus display can be used as a reach effect without degrading the distinguishability of symbols existing near the reach line in the final stop symbol array SA2.

  In addition, the reach line is formed in the configuration in which the display of the symbol line SA1 to SA3 is not displayed and the reach effect using the focus display is performed while the image forming the reach line or the image teaching the type is displayed. You may make it exclude the image which teaches the design currently performed or its kind from the blurring object. This makes it possible to use the focus display as a reach effect without reducing the distinguishability of the type of reach symbol.

  In addition, when focus display is performed as an effect for game times, the target to be excluded from the blur target may be other than symbols, and for example, an image for teaching the number of hold information is displayed on the display surface G. In this case, an image for teaching the number of the hold information may be excluded from the blur target.

  Focus display may be performed in a configuration in which image display using two-dimensional image data such as sprite data is performed instead of image display using three-dimensional image data. In this case, when setting sprite data in the frame regions 142a and 142b, coordinate data corresponding to the depth direction of the display surface G is set in each sprite data, and the coordinate data is used for the focus range and each blur range. Depending on which of them is included, a configuration in which blur display is performed can be considered.

  -After setting image data in the world coordinate system, a configuration for executing processing for creating map data including a parameter group may be performed for purposes other than focus display.

  For example, when displaying whether or not a predetermined area is blinking in an image for one frame, in a configuration in which one of lighting and extinguishing is set according to the orientation of the surface of the object, the world coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system In the state set to, the direction of each surface is read as a parameter, and map data is created as data obtained by collecting them. Then, the blinking display may be performed by processing the color information on the projected drawing data based on the created map data.

  In addition, for example, when displaying a surface such as the sea surface that changes over time in an image for one frame, the color information to be set for each surface data is selected according to the orientation of the surface of the object. In the state set in the coordinate system or the visual field coordinate system, the orientation of each surface is read as a parameter, and map data is created as data obtained by collecting them. Then, surface display may be performed by processing the color information on the projected drawing data based on the created map data.

<Configuration for pattern change display>
Next, a configuration for performing pattern change display will be described.

  Pattern change display means that when a special character is continuously displayed over a plurality of frames (a plurality of image update timings), the outer edge shape of the special character is the same, and the pattern is changed with the progress of the frame. It is a display effect. However, instead of simply changing the pattern, when changing the pattern of a part of the special character, the type of the first partial texture to be pasted on the special object corresponding to the special character is changed. Regarding the change of other patterns of the special character, the type of the second partial texture to be pasted to the special object is the same, but the relative pasting position of the second partial texture with respect to the special object is changed, Change the pattern.

  The special object, the first partial texture, and the second partial texture will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (c). 53 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special object PC20, and FIGS. 53 (b-1) to (b-3) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. 53 (c-1) to (c-4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the special object PC20 includes a large number of polygons, is created as data corresponding to a three-dimensional shape, and has a plurality of parts BP and AP1 to AP4. The plurality of parts BP, AP1 to AP4 includes a main body part BP and a plurality of attached parts AP1 to AP4 attached to the main body part BP. The special character is a character in which a whale is applied to a human form, the main body part part BP corresponds to the face part and the torso part, and the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 correspond to the hand part and the foot part continuous from the torso part. doing.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (b-1) to (b-3), the main body part portion BP performs display as if the face pattern (eyes and mouth pattern) and the body are reflected by light. First partial textures PC21 to PC23 for displaying an image including both of the patterns for printing are pasted. These first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are set so as to be able to cover the entire body part part BP. Further, the data for displaying the face pattern has the same position (coordinates) of the main body part part BP to which the data is pasted between the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. On the other hand, for data for displaying as if the body is reflecting light, the positions (coordinates) of the main body part part BP to which these data are pasted are the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. Are different.

  That is, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 display data for displaying an invariant pattern in which the position to be pasted in the main body part part BP does not change and a change pattern in which the position to be pasted in the main body part part BP changes. The data configuration for displaying the invariant pattern is common among the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but the data configuration for displaying the change pattern is different.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 53 (c-1) to (c-4), the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 are designed to display as if the hand or foot part is reflected by light. Second partial textures PC24 to PC27 for displaying an image including the above are pasted. These second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the attached part parts AP1 to AP4, and one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 with respect to one attached part part AP1 to AP4. Only provided. Each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 is set so as to cover the corresponding accessory part parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, in each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the pattern that generates the boundary part is set to have continuity with the pattern that generates the boundary part on the opposite side.

  The first partial textures PC21 to PC23 and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are attached to the special object PC20 based on predetermined UV coordinate values. The UV coordinate values are as described above, and are stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the image data for the object and the image data for the texture, and each pixel of the image data for the texture is stored. Can be made to correspond to each pixel of the image data for the object on a one-to-one basis.

  When the special character is displayed, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted are changed in a predetermined order with respect to the main body part BP of the special object PC20. This order is set so that the change pattern changes continuously. On the other hand, one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 corresponding to each of the attached parts AP1 to AP4 of the special object PC20 is pasted. The UV coordinates to be referred to when the pasting is performed. The value is changed in a predetermined manner from the initial setting state. The change of the UV coordinate value is set so that the aspect in which each pattern corresponding to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 changes has continuity.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pattern change display using the special object PC 20, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, and the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 will be described. The special object PC 20, the first partial textures PC 21 to PC 23, and the second partial textures PC 24 to PC 27 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for a special character executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the special character is executed in the effect calculation process in step S904 of the task process (FIG. 14). The calculation process for the special character is activated when a data table corresponding to the game times in which the special character is displayed is set.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether a special character is being displayed based on the currently set data table. If the special character is not being displayed, the process advances to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether it is the start timing of special character display. If it is not the start timing, the present calculation process is terminated, and if it is the start timing, the process proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, the special object PC 20 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table. Incidentally, at the execution timing of the process of step S3303, the control start process for the special object PC 20 is completed in the immediately preceding control start setting process (step S901). Information for controlling the special object PC 20 for which control has been started is stored and held in the work RAM 132 until the display of the special character is completed.

  In a succeeding step S3304, an initial setting process of the first partial texture is executed. Specifically, the first partial texture PC21 to which the order of use is set first among the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is specified, and the use instruction information of the first partial texture PC21 is stored. Note that the use order data of the plurality of types of first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as table information.

  In subsequent step S3305, initial setting processing of each second partial texture is executed. Here, in the case where the display CPU 131 changes the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27, the amount of change from the initial coordinate value is derived in a one-to-one correspondence with the second partial textures PC24 to PC27. Then, each derived change amount is provided to the VDP 135. The VDP 135 applies the provided change amount data to the corresponding initial coordinate values. In this case, when viewed with one second partial texture PC24 to PC27, since the second partial texture PC24 to PC27 includes a large number of pixels, an initial coordinate value exists for each of the large number of pixels. Yes. Therefore, the change amount data corresponding to one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 is uniformly applied to each initial coordinate value of the one second partial texture PC24 to PC27.

  For example, in a situation where the initial coordinate values of predetermined pixels constituting one second partial texture PC24 to PC27 are (U1, V1) and the initial coordinate values of other pixels are (U2, V2), the amount of change Is (w1, w2), the UV coordinate value of the predetermined pixel is set to (U1 + w1, V1 + w2), and the UV coordinate values of the other pixels are set to (U2 + w1, V2 + w2). The Therefore, the relative positions of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 with respect to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 have the same directionality and are changed with the same amount of change. Since step S3305 is an initial setting process, data corresponding to the fact that there is no change amount is stored.

  The change amount data for changing the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 from the initial coordinate values is set as table information in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on the order of use. The table information is stored in the memory module 133 in advance. The table information is individually set for each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27.

  Thereafter, in step S3306, the special character start designation information is stored. In step S3307, various parameters are calculated for the special object PC20, and the control information related to the special object PC20 is updated. This calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for the special character is executed as described above, information on the instruction to use the special object PC 20 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the above-described step S3304 is executed. The use instruction information of the first partial texture PC 21 stored in step S3305 and the data of each change amount derived in step S3305 are set. Furthermore, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set in the drawing list, and special character start designation information is set.

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the special character is being displayed, in step S3308, the special object PC20 is grasped as a control target based on the currently set data table.

  In the subsequent step S3309, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 based on the currently set data table. The update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 is set as once for a predetermined number of first specific number of frames, that is, once for a predetermined number of first specific number of image update timings. Furthermore, this update timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing, and from the predetermined first partial textures PC21 to PC23 to the next first part. The number of frames until the update timing of texture PC21 to PC23 (number of image update timings) and the number of frames from the first partial texture PC21 to PC23 to the update timing of the next first partial texture PC21 to PC23 ( The number of image update timings) may be different.

  If it is not the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, the use instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in the previous processing round is stored as it is in step S3310. On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, use instruction information corresponding to the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 in the next order is stored in step S3311.

  After executing the process of step S3310 or step S3311, it is determined in step S3312 whether it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value applied to each of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27. The update timing of the UV coordinate values is set once for a second specific number of frames that is a predetermined plurality, that is, once for a second specific number of image update timings that are a predetermined plurality. Timing is constant. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set once for each frame, that is, once for each image update timing. The number of frames up to (image update timing number) may be different from the number of frames (image update timing number) from the UV coordinate value until the next UV coordinate value update timing.

  The update timing of the UV coordinate values is synchronized with the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23, but may be asynchronous. In order to make it asynchronous, the structure which makes each update period different can be considered. In this case, the update timing of the UV coordinate values may be shorter or longer than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23. However, if the UV coordinate value is updated, the update cycle is shortened. However, in view of the fact that there is almost no influence on the data capacity, it is preferable that the update timing of the UV coordinate values is shorter than the update timing of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23.

  If it is not the update timing of the UV coordinate value, in step S3313, the data of each change amount stored in the previous processing time is stored as it is. On the other hand, if it is the update timing of the UV coordinate value, the data of each change amount in the next order is stored in step S3314.

  After executing the process of step S3313 or step S3314, in step S3315, the continuation designation information of the special character is stored, and in step S3307, various parameters are calculated for the special object PC20, and the special object PC20. After the control information related to is updated, this calculation process is terminated.

  When the calculation process for the special character is executed as described above, the use instruction information for the special object PC 20 is set in the drawing list created in the subsequent drawing list output process, and the above-described step S3310 and The use instruction information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 stored in any one of Steps S3311, and the data of each change amount stored in any of Steps S3313 and S3314 are set. Furthermore, the parameters calculated in step S3307 are set in the drawing list, and special character continuation designation information is set.

  In the VDP 135, when a drawing list on which a special character is to be displayed is received, processing for setting the special object PC 20 in the world coordinate system is executed in the rendering setting processing (step S1003) in the drawing processing (FIG. 16). To do. In this case, since the coordinates, scale, rotation angle, and the like for setting in the world coordinate system are also specified in the drawing list, the special object PC 20 is set with these applied. In addition, since the special character is displayed as if it is displaced in a predetermined direction over a plurality of frames, a drawing list corresponding to the special character is applied to the VDP 135, and the special character for the world coordinate system is applied in accordance with the drawing list. The object PC 20 is set.

  Further, in the VDP 135, when the drawing list on which the special character is to be displayed is received, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 with respect to the special object PC20 in the color information setting process (step S1009) in the drawing process (FIG. 16). And 2nd partial texture PC24-PC27 is affixed. Processing related to the pasting of the texture will be described below.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing texture mapping processing for a special character. The texture mapping process for the special character is started when either the special character start designation information or the special character continuation designation information is set in the current drawing list.

  First, in step S3401, the use designation information of the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 set in the current drawing list is grasped. In a succeeding step S3402, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 corresponding to the use designation information grasped in the step S3401 are read from the memory module 133. Thereafter, in step S3403, the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 read in step S3402 are pasted on the main body part BP of the special object PC20. Thereby, the pasting of the texture to the main body part part BP is completed.

  In the subsequent step S3404, “4” that is information corresponding to the number of the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 is set in the attached part counter provided in the register 153, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 corresponding to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical information of the current attached part counter are read from the memory module 133.

  In subsequent step S3406, data of initial coordinate values corresponding to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical value information of the current attached part counter is read. Further, in step S3407, the change amount data corresponding to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 indicated by the numerical value information of the current attached part counter is grasped from the change amount data set in the current drawing list. In step S3408, the current UV coordinate value is derived by applying the amount of change grasped in step S3407 to the initial coordinate value read in step S3406. Thereafter, in step S3409, the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 read in step S3405 are pasted on the corresponding accessory parts AP1 to AP4 in accordance with the UV coordinate values derived in step S3408.

  In subsequent step S3410, 1 is subtracted from the numerical value information of the attached part counter, and in step S3411, it is determined whether or not the numerical value information of the attached part counter after the subtraction is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process returns to step S3405, and the pasting process of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 in steps S3405 to S3409 is executed for the next accessory parts AP1 to AP4. If it is determined in step S3411 that the numerical information of the attached part counter is “0”, the texture mapping process is terminated.

  Next, the contents of the pattern change display will be described with reference to FIG.

  56 (a) and 56 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the pattern change display.

  In the pattern change display using the special character CH17, as shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b), a reach line is formed on a predetermined active line during the game, and the last stop symbol array SA2 is used. It is executed in the situation where the symbol variation display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, a pattern change display is performed as an effect for notifying the player that the game times have a high expectation level that will trigger the opening / closing execution mode. Note that the pattern change display using the special character CH17 may be generated with a predetermined probability only in the game times that trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the pattern change display, the special character CH17 is displayed displaced in a predetermined direction. In this case, the pattern attached to the special character CH17 is changed with the displacement of the special character CH17. Specifically, the surface of the special character CH17 is reflected by light and reflected, and the pattern is changed so that the portion that is reflected and brightened is displaced. This pattern change occurs in the main body part BP and each of the attached part parts AP1 to AP4. On the other hand, the positions of the eyes and mouth displayed on the special character CH17 are constant.

  As described above, a plurality of types of textures PC21 to PC23 are stored in advance for a part of the special object PC20, and the textures PC21 to PC23 to be pasted are sequentially changed. With respect to other parts of CH17, a single texture PC24 to PC27 is used, and the UV coordinate values of the texture PC24 to PC27 are sequentially changed, so that the pattern change display is performed while balancing the data capacity and the processing load. Can be performed.

  In addition, in a special character such as an eye or a mouth where a pattern whose relative position with respect to the outer edge does not change is not changed by changing the UV coordinate value of a single texture, Since the texture is changed by sequentially changing the textures PC21 to PC23 to be processed, it is possible to reduce the processing load when changing the pattern of the part.

  On the other hand, for the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 having a relatively small size, the pattern is changed by switching the UV coordinate values of the single textures PC24 to PC27. Even if the shape of the pattern is slightly deformed, it can be made inconspicuous.

<Another form of pattern change display>
-Instead of the configuration in which the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are set to correspond to the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 on a one-to-one basis, the predetermined second partial textures are provided for a plurality of attached part parts AP1 to AP4. May be used in common, or one second partial texture may be used in common for all the attached part parts AP1 to AP4. In this case, in order to make the patterns of the accessory parts AP1 to AP4 different, it is preferable to make the initial setting values of the UV coordinate values different.

  The speed at which the UV coordinate values of the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 to be pasted are changed in the attached part parts AP1 to AP4 is not limited to the same configuration, and partly differs. The configuration may be different, or the configuration may be different from each other.

  -It is good also as a structure by which the pattern is attached | subjected so that main body part part BP and at least one of attachment part parts AP1-AP4 may be straddled. In this case, when the appearance of the special character is changed, the change of the straddling pattern when the first partial textures PC21 to PC23 are changed so that the continuity of the pattern in the straddling portion is ensured. It is preferable that the mode and the pattern change mode straddling when the second partial textures PC24 to PC27 are changed are associated with each other.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following different embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) A configuration in which image data required for creating drawing data is not read from the memory module 133 at the required timing, but is read in advance to the VRAM 134 before the required timing. It is good. By performing such pre-reading, drawing data can be suitably created. In particular, when a NAND flash memory is used as the memory module 133, the time required for reading tends to be longer than that of the NOR flash memory. Therefore, the above-described pre-reading configuration is applied to such a configuration. It is effective. In addition to or instead of the image data used in the VDP 135, a program or data used in the display CPU 131 may be read in advance.

  (2) A rendering buffer in which rendering data for rendering is written and a buffer for symbols in which the rendering data for symbols are written are provided separately. The drawing data written in the buffer, the drawing data written in the effect buffer, and the drawing data written in the pattern drawing data may be combined. Alternatively, there are a buffer in which drawing data for the first effect is created and a buffer in which drawing data for the second effect is created. The drawing data for the first effect is for the background. The drawing data may be combined so that the drawing data for the second effect exists in the foreground, and the drawing data for the second effect exists in the foreground.

  (3) When color information setting processing (step S1009) is performed, color information such as texture pasting may be set only on the projected surface. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, color information such as texture mapping may be set after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

  (4) The camera (viewpoint) is configured to be set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. Instead, a single camera is used for all image data arranged in the world coordinate system. A configuration may be adopted in which cameras are set in common.

  (5) The image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, effect image, and design image, but may be configured to be projected in units of the background image and effect image. Further, it may be configured to project together in units of effect images and design images, or may be configured to project all together.

  (6) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 23 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 24 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launching handle 41.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 33 is acquired based on the first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 23 and the winning of the lower operating port 24. A second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is correct may be provided. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (7) A player in the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 becomes a target of the success / failure determination and the case where the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24 becomes a target of the success / failure determination It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiments, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (8) Based on the command output from the main control device 50, instead of the configuration in which the display control devices 70 and 130 are controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on the command output from the main control device 50, The display control devices 70 and 130 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control devices 70 and 130 are separately provided, both control devices may be provided as a single control device, and one of the two control devices. These functions may be integrated into the main controller 50, or both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 50. The configuration of commands output from the main controller 50 to the sound emission controller 60 is also arbitrary.

  (9) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, non-ballistic gaming machines, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels as a plurality of rotating bodies with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, start rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and stop Slot that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by operating the switch The present invention can also be applied to a machine. In this case, the present invention can be applied to various types of control of the slot machine, and the present invention is applied to control related to image display in the display control device in a configuration including a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in addition to the reel. Can be applied.

  In addition, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of a reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which is integrated.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of the image;
With
In the gaming machine in which the data generation means generates the generation data based on using image data and applying parameter data that determines the display mode of the image based on the image data.
The data generation means includes
Deriving means for deriving the parameter data to be applied when an image group including a plurality of individual images is displayed on the display unit (function for executing the processing of step S2204, step S2208, and step S2212 in VDP135, or step S2305 in VDP135) Step S2310, Step S2317),
Based on using the specific image data in a state where the parameter data derived by the deriving means is applied to the specific image data (particle dispersion object PC17), the generated data for displaying the image group on the display unit Image group means (a function for executing the processing of step S2206, step S2210, and step S2214 in VDP135, or a function for executing the processing of step S2307, step S2313, and step S2319 in VDP135) that enables generation;
With
The derivation means includes first parameter data (for example, first key data KD1) applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing, and a second update timing after the first update timing. And using the second parameter data (for example, second key data KD2) applied when displaying the image group, the image group is displayed at an update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A gaming machine characterized by having specific deriving means for deriving specific parameter data to be applied when displaying (a function for executing the process of step S2208 in VDP 135 or a function of executing the process of step S2310 in VDP 135) .

  According to the feature A1, by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images, the display content can be complicated, and the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit can be increased. Become.

  In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data Is not required to be stored in advance, and the data capacity can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to ensure continuity with respect to each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

  Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is the first parameter data and the second parameter as specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. As a result, parameter data to be referred to when deriving parameter data among a plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to the same update timing. Accordingly, the processing load for deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A2. The image group includes a first individual image (for example, a particle single image PT1) and a second individual image (for example, a particle single image PT2),
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image, and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image, and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means is applied when displaying the first individual image using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, and when displaying the second individual image. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the specific parameter data including the parameter data to be derived is derived.

  According to the feature A2, there is parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group in each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data. Become. Thus, in the configuration in which the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group is derived as specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing, When the display mode of the first individual image and the second individual image is changed as time passes, the changing mode can be made to correspond to each individual image.

  Feature A3. The game according to Feature A1 or A2, wherein the specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio. Machine.

  According to the feature A3, specific parameter data can be derived while using the first parameter data and the second parameter data as they are.

Feature A4. The image group includes a first individual image and a second individual image,
The first parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image, and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The second parameter data includes parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image, and parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image,
The specific derivation means includes
The first specific parameter data applied when displaying the first individual image using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, and the first specific parameter data applied when displaying the second individual image. Deriving the specific parameter data including two specific parameter data,
And when deriving the specific parameter data at a specific update timing, the predetermined ratio in deriving the first specific parameter data and the predetermined ratio in deriving the second specific parameter data And the gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein:

  According to the feature A4, each of the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data includes parameter data corresponding to each of the first individual image and the second individual image included in the image group. Become. Thus, in the configuration in which the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group is derived as specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing, When the display mode of the first individual image and the second individual image is changed as time passes, the changing mode can be made to correspond to each individual image.

  Further, in the configuration for deriving the specific parameter data so as to include each parameter data corresponding to each individual image in this way, a predetermined ratio used when deriving the first specific parameter data corresponding to the first individual image, The predetermined ratio used when deriving the second specific parameter data corresponding to the second individual image is the same. As a result, it becomes possible to use information of a predetermined ratio in common, and the processing load can be reduced as compared with configurations having different predetermined ratios.

Feature A5. Between the first update timing and the second update timing, there are a plurality of update timings at which the display mode of the image group is changed,
The specific deriving means includes the first parameter data and the second parameter at each of a plurality of update timings in which a display mode of the image group is changed between the first update timing and the second update timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the specific parameter data is derived using data.

  According to the feature A5, instead of using the same specific parameter data at each of a plurality of update timings included between the first update timing and the second update timing, the specific parameter data is individually obtained at each update timing. Therefore, the parameter data can be derived so as to gradually approach the first parameter data to the second parameter data. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player visually recognize the display mode of an image group as a series.

  Further, since the parameter data used at each of the plurality of update timings is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the data capacity is larger than the configuration in which the parameter data is stored in advance. Reduction. Furthermore, since the plurality of parameter data are all derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the type of parameter data to be referred to in deriving the plurality of parameter data is changed. There is no need. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature A6. The specific derivation means derives the specific parameter data by blending the first parameter data and the second parameter data at a predetermined ratio,
The data generating means is ratio determining means for determining the predetermined ratio in the case where the first parameter data and the second parameter data are blended at each of the plurality of update timings (the process of step S2109 in the display CPU 131). Or a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the VDP 135),
The ratio determining means is the amount of change in the predetermined ratio when the update timing is changed from one update timing to the next update timing in the plurality of update timings, and when the next update timing is further changed from the next update timing. The game machine according to A5, wherein the determination is performed so that the amount of change in the predetermined ratio is the same.

  According to the feature A6, at each of the plurality of update timings between the first update timing and the second update timing, it is only necessary to change the predetermined ratio with a constant change amount, and thus the predetermined ratio is changed. The above configuration can be simplified.

Feature A7. In order to display an image at one update timing, a drawing instruction unit (display CPU 131) that outputs drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data and parameter data applied to the image data is provided. ,
The display control unit is configured to display an image according to information instructed by the drawing instruction unit.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the display control means includes the specific derivation means.

  According to the feature A7, since it is not necessary to derive specific parameter data on the drawing instruction unit side, the processing load of the drawing instruction unit can be reduced.

  Feature A8. Any one of the characteristics A1 to A7, wherein the first parameter data, the second parameter data, and the specific parameter data include coordinate information for determining a position where the image group is displayed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to display an image in which the position of each individual image included in the image group changes while exhibiting the excellent effects as described above.

  Feature A9. The coordinate information corresponding to the specific parameter data is on a virtual straight line that connects the position of each individual image included in the image group to the position determined by the first parameter data and the position determined by the second parameter data. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the gaming machine is coordinate information.

  According to the feature A9, when the image group is displayed so as to move from the position determined by the first parameter data to the position determined by the second parameter data, the image group is moved on a straight line connecting the two positions. Therefore, when the specific parameter data is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the processing load at the time of deriving can be reduced.

  Feature A10. The game according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the deriving means derives the first parameter data and the second parameter data by reading them from a storage means (memory module 133). Machine.

  According to the feature A10, it is only necessary to read and use the first parameter data at the first update timing and read and use the second parameter data at the second update timing, so that the processing load at the update timing can be reduced. It is done. On the other hand, at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing, it is only necessary to derive the specific parameter data using the first parameter data and the second parameter data. The data capacity for storage can be reduced. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to perform display using an image group while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature A11. The data generation means includes an arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing in steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (function to execute the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135), and image data of the object is projected onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and based on the data projected on the projection plane Drawing setting means for generating generated data (a function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135),
The specific image data corresponds to image data of an object, and each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to each vertex data of the image data of the object. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A10.

  According to the feature A11, in a configuration that enables real image display using three-dimensional information, it is only necessary to arrange one object in a virtual three-dimensional space when displaying an image group, thereby reducing the processing load. However, it is possible to display an image group.

Feature A12. The arrangement means displays drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data required to display an image at one update timing and parameter data applied to the image data (display CPU 131). ) Is output, the generated data corresponding to the drawing instruction information can be generated by arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information. And
The drawing instruction means includes, when displaying the image group, use instruction information of the specific image data in the drawing instruction information,
When the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information of the specific image data, the arrangement unit arranges the specific image data in the virtual three-dimensional space, thereby generating generated data for displaying the image group. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being generated.

  According to the feature A12, when the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction unit only needs to include the use instruction information for one object in the drawing instruction information, so that the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. In addition, the data capacity of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

Feature A13. Arranging means for arranging image data of an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (Function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and image data of the object is projected onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane The drawing data generated by the data generation means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (the function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) is generated. Memory means to memorize And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In gaming machines equipped with
The data generation means is a derivation means for deriving parameter data to be applied when an image group including a plurality of individual images is displayed on the display unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S2204, S2208, and S2212 in the VDP 135, Or step S2305, step S2310, step S2317) in VDP135,
The arranging unit uses the specific image data in a state where the parameter data derived by the deriving unit is applied to the specific image data (particle dispersion object PC17), and the image unit is displayed on the display unit. Image group means capable of generating generation data to be displayed (function to execute the processing of step S2206, step S2210 and step S2214 in VDP135, or function to execute the processing of step S2307, step S2313 and step S2319 in VDP135) When,
With
The derivation means includes first parameter data (for example, first key data KD1) applied when displaying the image group at the first update timing, and a second update timing after the first update timing. And using the second parameter data (for example, second key data KD2) applied when displaying the image group, the image group is displayed at an update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing. A gaming machine characterized by having specific deriving means for deriving specific parameter data to be applied when displaying (a function for executing the process of step S2208 in VDP 135 or a function of executing the process of step S2310 in VDP 135) .

  According to the feature A13, realistic image display using three-dimensional information is possible, and further, display contents can be complicated by displaying an image group including a plurality of individual images. Therefore, the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit can be increased.

  In this case, since the specific parameter data at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is derived using the first parameter data and the second parameter data, the specific parameter data Is not required to be stored in advance, and the data capacity can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to ensure continuity with respect to each of the first parameter data and the second parameter data.

  Furthermore, the parameter data for displaying a plurality of individual images included in the image group at the update timing between the first update timing and the second update timing is the first parameter data and the second parameter as specific parameter data. It is derived collectively using data. As a result, parameter data to be referred to when deriving parameter data among a plurality of individual images included in the image group corresponds to the same update timing. Accordingly, the processing load for deriving the specific parameter data can be reduced.

Feature A14. Arranging means for arranging image data of an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (The function of executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and the image data of the object is projected onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generation data is generated based on the data projected onto the projection plane. Generation data (drawing data) generated by data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having drawing setting means (function to execute the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in VDP135). Memory means to memorize And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In gaming machines equipped with
The display control means is configured to simultaneously display an image group including a plurality of individual images by using specific generation data.
The image data arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means for displaying the image group is identified by each of the plurality of individual images included in the image group being associated with each vertex data. A game machine characterized by being image data of an object (object PC17 for particle dispersion).

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to display a realistic image using three-dimensional information. In this case, when displaying the image group, it is only necessary to arrange one object in the virtual three-dimensional space. Therefore, it is possible to display the image group while reducing the processing load.

Feature A15. The arrangement means displays drawing instruction information (drawing list) including at least information specifying image data required to display an image at one update timing and parameter data applied to the image data (display CPU 131). ) Is output, the generated data corresponding to the drawing instruction information can be generated by arranging the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space according to the information instructed by the drawing instruction information. And
The drawing instruction means, when displaying the image group, includes use instruction information of image data of the specific object in the drawing instruction information,
The arrangement means displays the image group by arranging the image data of the specific object in the virtual three-dimensional space when the drawing instruction information includes use instruction information of the image data of the specific object. The game machine according to Feature A14, wherein generation data to be generated can be generated.

  According to the feature A15, when the image group is displayed, the drawing instruction unit only needs to include the use instruction information for one object in the drawing instruction information. Therefore, the processing load required for setting the drawing instruction information can be reduced. In addition, the data capacity of the drawing instruction information can be reduced.

  The invention of the above-described feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, a polygon that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the polygon. Generated data is generated by projecting a texture-attached polygon onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

  Here, it is considered that the player's interest in the image displayed on the display unit can be increased by making the display direction of the individual images complicated or by simultaneously displaying a plurality of individual images. However, when such an image is displayed, it is not preferable that the processing load is extremely increased and the data capacity is extremely increased.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect satisfactorily while suppressing a processing load.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Arranging means for arranging image data of an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (Function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and image data of the object is projected onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane The drawing data generated by the data generation means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (the function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) is generated. Memory means to memorize And Mubaffa 142),
A display control unit (of the VDP 135) displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage unit on the display unit (symbol display device 31) and updates the content of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. Display circuit 155),
In gaming machines equipped with
The image data of the object to be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means has data capable of defining a plurality of surfaces, and a three-dimensional shape by the plurality of surface data (surface data SD). Image data of a multi-face object (sea surface object PC19) that can be defined,
The data generation means includes
When the image data of the multifaceted object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space to display the multifaceted image corresponding to the image data of the multifaceted object over a plurality of update timings, the display mode of the multifaceted image is changed. As described above, arrangement mode changing means for changing the arrangement mode in the virtual three-dimensional space for at least a part of the plurality of plane data (a function for executing arithmetic processing for sea level display in the display CPU 131, for sea level display in the VDP 135 Function to execute the setting process)
By changing color information applied to the surface data whose arrangement mode has been changed by the arrangement mode changing unit in units of the plane data according to the arrangement mode of the surface data, at least one of the multi-plane images. Display color changing means (a function for executing color information setting processing for sea level display in VDP 135) that enables image display in which the display color of the area of the image is different between a plurality of update timings;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the arrangement mode for at least a part of the plurality of plane data is changed, and the color information applied to the plane data whose arrangement mode is changed is changed along with the change of the arrangement mode. Is done. Thereby, it becomes possible to complicate the display effect and to increase the player's interest in the display effect.

  Further, the color information is changed in units of the surface data according to the arrangement mode of the surface data. Accordingly, it is possible to set the color information according to the arrangement mode of the surface data without storing in advance a large number of textures corresponding to the pattern whose color information is changed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in display effects while suppressing an increase in data capacity.

  In addition, the configuration that “the arrangement mode changing unit changes at least one of the orientation, shape, and size of at least a part of the plurality of surface data when changing the arrangement mode” is the above configuration. included.

  Feature B2. The arrangement mode changing means changes the arrangement mode of part of the surface data among the plurality of surface data, and causes the arrangement mode of other surface data to correspond to the change of the arrangement mode for the part of the surface data. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further comprising (a function for executing a normal parameter setting process in the VDP 135).

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the surface data without losing the continuity between the surface data.

  Feature B3. The arrangement mode changing unit changes a predetermined parameter that is at least one of orientation, shape, and size with respect to discontinuous surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) whose corresponding regions in the multi-surface image are not continuous with each other. And means for causing the predetermined parameter of surface data (buffer surface data SD2) corresponding to the region corresponding to the discontinuous surface data to correspond to the discontinuous surface data in the multi-surface image. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, further comprising (a function for executing normal parameter setting processing in the VDP 135).

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to individually control the arrangement mode of the plane data while not losing the continuity between the plane data. In particular, the object of actively changing the arrangement mode is discontinuous surface data, and for the surface data continuous to the discontinuous surface data, such separation is performed by corresponding to the discontinuous surface data. Compared to the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed without performing the processing, the processing load required for adjustment for ensuring the continuity between the surface data can be reduced.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature B3,
“Each surface data is defined by a plurality of vertex data, and the predetermined plurality of surface data share some vertex data with each other,
The arrangement mode changing unit changes a predetermined parameter that is at least one of orientation, shape, and size with respect to surface data (surface data SD1 to be applied) that does not share the vertex data with each other, and changes them. Means (normal parameter setting processing in VDP 135) for associating the predetermined parameter of the surface data (buffer surface data SD2) that shares the vertex data with the target surface data into the target surface data to be changed. Have the ability to execute)
The configuration can be considered.

Feature B4. Each of the surface data is determined by a plurality of vertex data, and the predetermined plurality of surface data share some vertex data with each other,
The arrangement mode changing unit changes at least one of the orientation, shape, and size of each surface data by individually changing the coordinates of each of the vertex data. A gaming machine according to B2.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to change at least one of the direction, shape, and size of the plurality of surface data by changing the coordinates of one vertex data. Instead of controlling parameters in units of plane data in this way, by controlling parameters in units of vertex data, it is not necessary to set a processing configuration for ensuring continuity between plane data. The arrangement mode can be individually controlled.

Feature B5. The arrangement mode changing means includes:
Data for reading out individual control data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) from the storage means (memory module 133) that enables each arrangement mode of the plurality of surface data to be individually changed. Reading means (function of executing step S2503 in the VDP 135);
Application changing means for changing the mode in which the individual control data is applied to the image data of the multi-faceted object between the plurality of update timings (a function for executing the processing of steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and S2512 in the VDP 135) )When,
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which the arrangement mode of the plane data is changed using the individual control data stored in advance, the display mode of the multi-plane image is changed between a plurality of update timings while using the individual control data. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature B6. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data is applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data,
The application changing unit is a correspondence changing unit (in the VDP 135, for changing the correspondence between the unit control data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data in the image data of the multi-face object. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, which includes a function of executing the processing of Step S2506, Step S2507, Step S2511, and Step S2512).

  According to the feature B6, since the display mode of the multi-plane image is changed between a plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the target data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data, the individual control data It is possible to reduce the processing load in the configuration in which the display mode of the multi-plane image is changed while using.

  Feature B7. The application changing unit is a plurality of applying units (steps S2506 and S2507 in the VDP 135) that reflect the contents of the plurality of unit control data to one data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multi-plane object. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, further including a function of executing the processing of step S2511 and step S2512).

  According to the feature B7, in the configuration in which the arrangement mode is changed with reference to the unit control data, the arrangement mode to be changed can be diversified.

Feature B8. The individual control data has a plurality of unit control data (unit normal data UND), and the unit control data is applied to the surface data or data defining the surface data,
The data reading means reads a plurality of the individual control data from the storage means,
The application changing means is
Multiple application means for reflecting the contents of each unit control data of the plurality of individual control data to one data to which the unit control data is applied in the image data of the multifaceted object (steps S2507 and steps in the VDP 135) The function of executing the processing of S2512),
The correspondence between the data to which the unit control data is applied and the unit control data in the image data of the multifaceted object is changed according to the switching of the update timing, and the change of the correspondence is changed to the plurality of individual control data Correspondence changing means (function for executing the processing of step S2506 and step S2511 in VDP135) to be performed for each of
A gaming machine according to Feature B5 or B6, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to change the arrangement mode in a complex manner while facilitating the design of the individual control data in the gaming machine design stage.

Feature B9. The arrangement mode changing means includes:
First changing means for collectively changing the arrangement mode for a group of data including the plurality of surface data (a function for executing arithmetic processing for sea level display in the display CPU 131, a function for executing steps S2504 and S2509 in the VDP 135); ,
Second changing means for individually changing the arrangement mode of each surface data included in the group of data whose arrangement mode has been changed by the first changing unit (the processing of steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and S2512 in the VDP 135) Function to execute)
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B9, it is possible to change the arrangement mode in units of plane data in a complicated manner while changing the arrangement mode along a large flow.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration for producing such an effect, “the type of the arrangement mode changed by the first changing means is at least one of position, orientation, and size, and the second change The arrangement mode changed by the means includes at least a part of the arrangement target type changed by the first changing means ”.

  In addition, the image data of the multifaceted object includes a plurality of the group of data, and the first changing unit individually changes an arrangement mode of the plurality of groups of data. Conceivable.

Feature B10. The display color changing means is
Classification specifying means for specifying whether or not color information to be applied to the surface data is included in a predetermined classification according to the arrangement mode to be changed by the arrangement mode changing unit (steps S2702 to S2702 in the VDP 135) The function of executing S2705),
Color information for selecting color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined classification by the classification specifying means from among a plurality of levels of color information based on parameters of a different type from the arrangement mode Selection means (function of executing steps S2706 and S2707 in the VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, comprising:

  According to the feature B10, the color information is determined based on parameters different from the arrangement mode while the color information is changed according to the arrangement mode, so that the color information can be set in a complicated manner. This makes it possible to realize a realistic image display.

Feature B11. The arrangement mode changing means changes at least the direction of the surface data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein the display color changing unit changes color information applied to the surface data based on an angle of the surface data with respect to the viewpoint. .

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to set color information according to the orientation of the surface, and it is possible to display a multi-surface image realistically.

Feature B12. The display color changing means is
According to the orientation of the surface data changed by the arrangement mode changing means, classification specifying means for specifying whether or not the color information to be applied to the surface data is included in a predetermined classification (step S2702 in the VDP 135) The function of executing step S2705),
Color information selection for selecting color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined classification by the classification specifying means from among a plurality of stages of color information based on parameters of a type different from the orientation Means (function of executing steps S2706 and S2707 in the VDP 135);
A gaming machine according to Feature B11, comprising:

  According to the feature B12, the color information is determined based on parameters different from the direction of the surface while changing the color information according to the direction of the surface, so that the color information can be set in a complicated manner. Thereby, it becomes possible to display a multi-plane image realistically.

  Feature B13. The color information selection unit is configured to apply color information to be applied to the surface data identified as being included in the predetermined category by the category identification unit based on a distance in a predetermined direction from the viewpoint. The gaming machine according to Feature B12, wherein the gaming machine is selected from the inside.

  According to the feature B13, since the color information changes according to the position of the surface as well as the direction of the surface, it is possible to display a multi-surface image realistically.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature B group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the object. Generation data is generated by projecting the object to which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

  Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased in order to further improve the display effect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of the image;
In gaming machines equipped with
The display mode of the image in the display unit includes a mode in which a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generation means includes an individual image displayed to be recognized by the player as being present on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the back side in the depth direction. The target individual image that is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in the image is contoured compared to the image recognized by the player as being present at the reference position A gaming machine comprising blur setting means (a function for executing an adjustment process for focus effect in the VDP 135) that causes a line to be displayed in a blurred state when the line becomes unclear.

  According to the feature C1, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

Feature C2. The data generation means generates the generation data based on setting image data, and further sets the image data in a state where a depth parameter corresponding to the display position in the depth direction is applied. Based on the display mode, the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction.
The generated data has many unit data in which color information is set,
The blur setting means includes
Parameter deriving means for deriving the depth parameter for each of the data corresponding to the image data set in the setting storage means and generating the unit data (perform steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135) Function)
Performing blurring so that an image portion corresponding to the data is displayed in a blurred state by performing blurring generation processing on data whose depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter corresponding to the reference position Means (function of executing steps S3110 to S3115 in the VDP 135);
The gaming machine according to Feature C1, further comprising:

  According to the feature C2, since it is not necessary to store image data for a blurred state in advance, it is possible to display in a blurred state while reducing the data capacity. In addition, since the depth parameter is derived for each piece of data that generates each unit data, it is possible to finely control the display in a blurred state.

Feature C3. The display effect in the display means includes a blur display effect in which the display in the blurred state is performed over a plurality of update timings,
The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the parameter derivation means derives the depth parameter at one update timing and another update timing of the one blur display effect. .

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to change the blurred display according to the progress of the display effect.

Feature C4. The data generation means includes an arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing in steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135), and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint Drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The parameter deriving means derives the depth parameter for each unit data included in the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection,
The gaming machine according to Feature C2 or C3, wherein the blurring execution unit is configured to execute the blur generation process on the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection by using the depth parameter. .

  According to the feature C4, the depth parameter derivation and the blur generation process are not performed on the three-dimensional information data, but on the two-dimensional information data. Therefore, the processing load is reduced. However, the above excellent effects can be achieved.

  Feature C5. As the blur generation process, the blur executing unit blends the color information of the unit data included in the data of the two-dimensional information after the projection with the color information of the surrounding unit data (steps S3206 and S3212 in the VDP 135). And the function of executing step S3217). The gaming machine according to Feature C4,

  According to the feature C5, since the blending process is executed when blurring occurs, it is possible to display a blurred state according to the type of image displayed in the blurred display effect. Thus, it is possible to suitably display the blurred state. In this case, the blending process is not performed on the data of the three-dimensional information but on the data of the two-dimensional information, so that the display of the blurred state is performed while reducing the processing load. Can be suitably performed.

Feature C6. The data generation means includes an arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing in steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135), and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint Drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The blur setting means performs blur generation processing on the data of the two-dimensional information after projection so that the target individual image is displayed in a blurred state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5.

  According to the feature C6, the blur generation process is not performed on the data of the three-dimensional information, but on the data of the two-dimensional information. An excellent effect can be achieved.

  Feature C7. When the blur setting means performs display in the blurred state, the special image (teaching individual images CH15 and CH16) is present at a position shifted in the depth direction with respect to the reference position. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the gaming machine is excluded from the display target in the blurred state even if it is displayed so as to be recognized by the player.

  According to the feature C7, when the display in the blurred state is performed, the display in the uniformly blurred state is applied to the individual image displayed so as to exist at a position shifted from the reference position. Attempting to do so may make it difficult for the player to recognize information that should be recognized. On the other hand, the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state regardless of whether or not the special image is displayed at the reference position. It is possible to realize a display in a blurred state while suppressing the occurrence of.

  The special image includes a teaching image that is used to teach the player the gaming situation.

  Feature C8. The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the special image is an image displayed so as to be recognized by a player as being present on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the reference position.

  According to the feature C8, in the configuration in which the special image is excluded from the display target in the blurred state, the player can easily recognize that the special image is intentionally excluded. Therefore, it is possible to exclude the special image from the display object in the blurred state without giving a sense of incongruity to the display effect in the blurred state.

Feature C9. Operation receiving means (production operation device 48) for receiving an operation by a player is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the blur setting unit changes the reference position based on a player's operation on the operation receiving unit.

  According to the feature C9, uniform display effects in a blurred state can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the display effects can be increased.

  Feature C10. The blur setting means does not display the blurred state during a predetermined first display period (game times), and the processing load of processing excluding the processing required for the display of the blurred state is the first display period. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the blurred display is performed in a second display period (round game) lower than the period.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to suppress the processing load at the update timing from being extremely increased when the display in the blurred state is performed.

Feature C11. The data generation means generates the generation data based on setting image data,
The blur setting means blends at least a part of color information determined by the image data with surrounding color information so that the target individual image is displayed in a blurred state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein:

  According to the feature C11, since the blending process is executed when blurring occurs, it is possible to display a blurred state according to the type of image displayed in the blurred display effect. Thus, it is possible to suitably display the blurred state.

Feature C12. The data generation means generates the generation data based on setting image data, and further sets the image data in a state where a depth parameter corresponding to the display position in the depth direction is applied. Based on the display mode, the player recognizes that the plurality of individual images are displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction.
The blur setting unit blurs the target individual image corresponding to the image data by executing blur generation processing on the image data whose depth parameter does not correspond to the reference parameter corresponding to the reference position. To be displayed in the state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the reference parameter has a predetermined parameter range such that the reference position corresponds to the predetermined range in the depth direction.

  According to the feature C12, it is possible to display a blurred state with the depth of field extended to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to suitably display a blurred state.

  Feature C13. The blur setting means exists at a position farther in the depth direction than the predetermined distance than an image recognized by the player as being at a position away from the reference position by a predetermined distance in the depth direction. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C12, wherein an image recognized by the player when displayed is greater in degree of display in the blurred state.

  According to the feature C13, it is possible to display the blurred state more realistically.

Feature C14. Arranging means for arranging image data of an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (Function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and image data of the object is projected onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane The drawing data generated by the data generation means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (the function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) is generated. Memory means to memorize And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In gaming machines equipped with
The display mode of the image in the display unit includes a mode in which a plurality of individual images are displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being displayed in a positional relationship shifted in the depth direction of the display unit. ,
The data generation means includes an individual image displayed to be recognized by the player as being present on the near side in the depth direction with respect to the predetermined reference position in the depth direction, and the back side in the depth direction. The target individual image that is at least one of the individual images displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being present in the image is contoured compared to the image recognized by the player as being present at the reference position A gaming machine comprising blur setting means (a function for executing an adjustment process for focus effect in the VDP 135) that causes a line to be displayed in a blurred state when the line becomes unclear.

  According to the feature C14, it is possible to perform a display effect as if the reference position is in focus, and it is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of depth.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the object to which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, in order to increase the player's attention to the display effect, it is preferable to perform more realistic image display, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 31) having a display unit (display surface G);
When an image is displayed on the display unit using the generation data (drawing data) generated by the data generation unit (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and a predetermined update timing is reached. Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for updating the contents of the image;
With
In the gaming machine in which the data generation means generates the generation data based on using image data and applying parameter data that determines the display mode of the image based on the image data.
The generated data has many unit data in which color information is set,
The data generating means is a set data deriving means (step in the VDP 135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generating unit data for generating each unit data. A function of executing S2503, a function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135), and applying each unit parameter data included in the aggregate data derived by the aggregate data deriving means to each of the generating unit data To generate the generated data, and to generate the generated data in which the same kind of individual images are displayed in different modes by changing at least one of the method of applying the set data and the content of the set data to be applied A gaming machine that is characterized by

  According to the feature D1, each unit parameter data group is handled as aggregate data, so that the processing for data handling can be simplified. In addition, since it is a configuration in which generation data is generated in which the same type of individual images are displayed in different modes by changing at least one of the method of applying the set data and the content of the set data to be applied. It is possible to diversify display effects while suppressing the amount of image data stored in advance.

  Feature D2. The set data deriving means derives the set data by reading the set data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) from the storage means (memory module 133). The gaming machine according to Feature D1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature D2, it is possible to achieve the above excellent effects while reducing the processing load.

Feature D3. The data generation means includes an arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing in steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135), and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint Drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The set data (first normal map data ND1, second normal map data ND2) derived by the set data deriving means is applied to the image data of the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or D2, wherein

  According to the feature D3, since it is possible to change the arrangement mode of the image data of the three-dimensional information using the collective data, it is possible to display a more complicated image while realizing a realistic image display. It becomes. In this case, when the complicated image display is performed, the aggregate data is used as described above, so that it is possible to balance both the data capacity and the processing load.

Feature D4. The set data deriving means derives the set data (blur map data) by specifying each unit parameter data (Z value) corresponding to the set state in a state where the image data is set. Is,
The data generation means generates the generation data based on applying the derived set data to data generated from the image data. Features D1 to D3 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature D4, it is not necessary to store the collective data in advance, so that it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while reducing the data capacity.

  Feature D5. The collective data deriving unit derives the collective data corresponding to each of the generated data in a situation where the generated data is generated using the collective data. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, different set data can be used at each update timing, and display effects can be diversified. Even in this case, the collective data is not stored in advance, but is created each time, so that it is possible to diversify display effects while reducing the data capacity.

Feature D6. The data generation means includes an arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing in steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135), and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint Drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The set data deriving unit derives the set data (blur map data) by specifying each unit parameter data (Z value) according to the arrangement mode of the image data of the object by the arrangement unit. The gaming machine according to Feature D4 or D5, wherein

  According to the feature D6, in the configuration in which the real image display is realized by using the image data of the three-dimensional information, the collective data is created in accordance with the data setting mode that enables the real image display. It is possible to prevent the use of the collective data from adversely affecting the realistic image display.

Feature D7. The data generation means includes an arrangement means for arranging image data of an object, which is three-dimensional information, in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function for executing the processing in steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space. Viewpoint setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135), and two-dimensional information projected on the projection plane by projecting the image data of the object onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint Drawing setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) for generating generation data that is two-dimensional information based on the data of
The collective data (blurred map data) derived by the collective data deriving unit is applied to the data of the two-dimensional information after projection, according to any one of the features D1 to D6 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D7, the collective data is not applied to the data of the three-dimensional information, but is applied to the data of the two-dimensional information. Therefore, while reducing the processing load, It is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

  Feature D8. The data generation means is configured to display the same type of individual images based on different modes when the unit parameter data of the aggregate data is applied to the generation unit data between a plurality of update timings. Generation execution means for generating the generated data corresponding to the change (function to execute the processing of step S2506, step S2507, step S2511 and step S2512 in VDP 135, function to execute step S1010 to step S1012) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein:

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to change the display mode of the same type of individual images between a plurality of update timings while using a single set of data. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while balancing both the data capacity and the processing load.

  Feature D9. The generation execution means changes the correspondence relationship between each unit parameter data and each generation unit data as the update timing is switched (steps S2506, S2507, S2511 and steps in the VDP 135). The game machine according to Feature D8, which includes a function of executing the processing of S2512).

  According to the feature D9, since the display mode of the image is changed between a plurality of update timings by switching the correspondence between the unit parameter data and the generation unit data, the image display can be performed while using the collective data. In the configuration in which the aspect is changed, the processing load can be reduced.

  Feature D10. The generation execution unit includes a plurality of application units (steps S2506 and S2507 in the VDP 135) that reflect the contents of a plurality of unit parameter data for one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each unit data for generation. The game machine according to feature D8 or D9, further comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2511 and S2512).

  According to the feature D10, in the configuration in which the display mode is changed while referring to the unit parameter data, the display mode to be changed can be diversified.

Feature D11. The set data deriving means is for deriving a plurality of the set data,
The generation execution means includes
A plurality of applying means (steps S2507 and S2512 in the VDP 135) reflect the contents of the unit parameter data of the plurality of aggregate data to one data to which the unit parameter data is applied in each of the generating unit data. Function to execute processing)
In each of the generating unit data, the correspondence between the data to which the unit parameter data is applied and the unit parameter data is changed as the update timing is switched, and the change in the correspondence is changed in the plurality of set data. Correspondence changing means (function to execute the processing of step S2506 and step S2511 in VDP135) to be performed for each,
The gaming machine according to Feature D8, comprising:

  According to the feature D11, it is possible to change the display mode in a complex manner while facilitating the design of the collective data at the gaming machine design stage.

Feature D12. Arranging means for arranging image data of an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (Function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and image data of the object is projected onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane The drawing data generated by the data generation means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (the function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) is generated. Memory means to memorize And Mubaffa 142),
Display control means (display circuit 155 of VDP 135) for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means (symbol display device 31);
In gaming machines equipped with
The generated data has many unit data in which color information is set,
The data generating means is a set data deriving means (step in the VDP 135) for deriving set data (normal map data ND1, ND2, blur map data) to be used for each generating unit data for generating each unit data. A function of executing S2503, a function of executing steps S3101 to S3107 in the VDP 135), and applying each unit parameter data included in the aggregate data derived by the aggregate data deriving means to each of the generating unit data To generate the generated data, and to generate the generated data in which the same kind of individual images are displayed in different modes by changing at least one of the method of applying the set data and the content of the set data to be applied A gaming machine that is characterized by

  According to the feature D12, each unit parameter data group is handled as aggregate data, so that the processing for data handling can be simplified. In addition, since it is a configuration in which generation data is generated in which the same type of individual images are displayed in different modes by changing at least one of the method of applying the set data and the content of the set data to be applied. It is possible to diversify display effects while suppressing the amount of image data stored in advance.

  The invention of the above-described feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  The case where the image is displayed using the two-dimensional image data will be described in more detail. The image data memory stores image data for displaying a background and image data for displaying a character or the like. Has been. Further, by reading out the image data, generation data for displaying a character or the like in front of the background is generated in a storage unit such as a VRAM. Then, by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data, an image in which characters and the like are arranged in front of the background is displayed on the display unit.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the object. Drawing data is created by projecting the object to which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the drawing data.

  Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased in order to further improve the display effect.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Arranging means for arranging image data of an object that is three-dimensional information in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S1002 to S1004 in the VDP 135), and viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (Function for executing the processing of step S1006 in the VDP 135) and image data of the object is projected onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and generated data (drawing data) based on the data projected onto the projection plane The drawing data generated by the data generation means (the display CPU 131, the geometry calculation unit 151, and the rendering unit 152) having the drawing setting means (the function for executing the processing of steps S1010 to S1012 in the VDP 135) is generated. Memory means to memorize And Mubaffa 142),
A display control unit (of the VDP 135) displays an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage unit on the display unit (symbol display device 31) and updates the content of the image when a predetermined update timing is reached. Display circuit 155),
In gaming machines equipped with
The data generation means includes texture setting means (function to execute texture mapping processing for special characters in VDP) for setting texture image data for the image data of the object,
Predetermined object data (special object PC20) used when displaying a predetermined individual image (special character) as image data of the object is included, and is further set for the predetermined object data as image data of the texture. Predetermined texture data (first partial texture PC21 to PC23, second partial texture PC24 to PC27),
The predetermined texture data is
First texture data (first partial textures PC21 to PC23) set for the first part data (main body part part BP) of the predetermined object data;
Second texture data (second partial textures PC24 to PC27) set for second part data (attached part parts AP1 to AP4) of the predetermined object data;
Is included,
The texture setting means includes
First setting means for changing the type of the first texture data set for the first part data (function for executing steps S3401 to S3403 in the VDP 135);
When setting the second texture data for the second part data, second setting means (steps S3405 to S3409 in the VDP 135 is used to change the setting positional relationship of the second texture data with respect to the second part data. Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when changing the appearance of the predetermined individual image, the type of texture data to be set is not changed at once, but the type is changed for the first texture data which is a part of the texture data. The second texture data, which is another part of the texture data, is configured to change the setting positional relationship with respect to the second part data. As a result, while the appearance of some of the predetermined individual images is changed in a complicated manner, the data capacity can be reduced instead of reducing the complexity of the change in the appearance of the other portions. Therefore, it is possible to change the appearance of the predetermined individual image as described above while balancing the data capacity and the processing load.

  Feature E2. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein a ratio of the second part data in the predetermined individual image is smaller than a ratio of the first part data.

  According to the feature E2, the region where the setting position relationship is changed instead of the texture data type is less changed when the appearance is changed than the region where the type is changed instead of the texture data setting position relationship. However, since the former area is smaller, it is possible to make the player recognize that the appearance of the predetermined individual image has changed greatly.

  Feature E3. In an area occupied by the first part data in the predetermined individual image corresponding to the predetermined object data, there is an image part (eyes or mouth pattern part) whose relative position with respect to a specific outer edge part does not change in the predetermined individual image. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that

  According to the feature E3, since the image portion that is not preferable when the relative position changes is set as the first texture data, it is possible to suitably change the appearance of the region including the image portion.

  Feature E4. In the second texture data, the color information set in one boundary portion has continuity with the color information set in the opposite boundary portion. The gaming machine according to any one of E3.

  According to the feature E4, when the setting positional relationship of the second texture data is changed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a pattern boundary in the predetermined individual image.

Feature E5. There are a plurality of combinations of the second part data and the second texture data,
The second setting means is configured to change the setting positional relationship of the other second texture data when changing the setting positional relationship of one of the second texture data. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature E5, in a configuration in which a plurality of second texture data are present, the processing load required for setting the second texture data can be reduced.

  The feature E group invention is effective for the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  In recent years, an attempt has been made to display a more three-dimensional image by using image data defined in three dimensions rather than simply displaying a two-dimensional image. When performing the display, an object that is 3D image data is set in the virtual 3D space, and a texture that is 2D image data such as a character or a pattern is pasted on the object. Generation data is generated by projecting the object to which the texture is pasted onto a plane from a desired viewpoint. A three-dimensional image is displayed by outputting a signal to the display device based on the generated data.

  Here, in order to increase the player's interest in the display effect, it is preferable to further improve the display effect. On the other hand, it is not preferable that the data capacity is extremely increased in order to further improve the display effect.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means Then, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is stopped, and a gaming machine that gives a privilege to the player according to the picture after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 31 ... Symbol display device, 48 ... Operation device for production, 131 ... Display CPU, 133 ... Memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142 ... Frame buffer, 151 ... Geometry calculation part, 152 ... Rendering part, 155 ... Display circuit, AP1 to AP4 ... accessory parts, BP ... main body parts, CH15 ... individual image for teaching, CH16 ... individual image for teaching, KD1 ... first key data, KD2 ... second key data, ND1 ... first 1 normal map data, ND2 ... second normal map data, PC17 ... particle dispersion object, PC19 ... sea surface object, PC20 ... special object, PC21-PC23 ... first partial texture, PC24-PC27 ... second partial texture , PT1 ... particle single image, PT2 ... particle single image, SD ... surface data, SD ... Applies to the surface data, SD2 ... the surface data of the buffer.

Claims (2)

Arrangement means for arranging image data of an object as three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space, viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the object on a projection plane set based on the viewpoint A storage unit that stores the generated data generated by the data generating unit, and a drawing setting unit that generates the generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane.
Display control means for outputting and displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the storage means on the display means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The image data of the object to be arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space by the arrangement means has data capable of defining a plurality of surfaces, and a three-dimensional shape can be defined by the plurality of surface data. Contains image data of multi-faceted objects,
The data generation means includes
When the image data of the multi-plane object is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space to display a multi-plane image corresponding to the image data of the multi-plane object over a plurality of update timings, the virtual 3D of the plurality of plane data A data reading means for reading the set data from the storage means enabling each direction in the space to be changed individually;
By applying the set data to one surface data among adjacent surface data in the plurality of surface data, the direction of the one surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed, and the other surface data is changed to the one surface data. Means for changing the orientation of the other surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space by following the change in the orientation of the surface data in the virtual three-dimensional space;
An application changing unit that changes a mode when the aggregate data is applied to the image data of the multifaceted object between the plurality of update timings;
By changing color information applied to the surface data whose orientation has been changed in units of the surface data in accordance with the orientation of the surface data, the display color of at least a partial region of the multi-surface image Display color changing means for enabling image display that is different between a plurality of update timings;
With
The set data has more unit control data for determining the orientation of one of the surface data than the number of the surface data,
The application changing unit is configured to change the positional relationship of the set data in the virtual three-dimensional space with respect to the image data of the multifaceted object according to switching of the update timing, whereby the unit control data in the image data of the multifaceted object The game machine is characterized in that the correspondence relationship between the surface data to be applied and the unit control data is changed as the update timing is switched.   The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images